﻿<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><Search><pages Count="244"><page Index="1"><![CDATA[2026 Yamaha Boat

                                                   AR220 / SX220


                                                        222S / 222SE


                                                                             222SD







                                OWNER’S/OPERATOR’S MANUAL























                                                                              U.S.A. Edition



                               Read this manual carefully                      LIT-18626-15-85
                         before operating this boat.                              F7G-F8199-12]]></page><page Index="2"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 1  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM




















                                              WARNING:
                                                                             Operating, servicing
                                         and maintaining a recreational marine
                                         vessel can expose you to chemicals
                                         including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
                                         phthalates, and lead, which are known to
                                         the State of California to cause cancer and
                                         birth defects or other reproductive harm. To
                                         minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
                                         service your vessel in a well-ventilated area
                                         and wear gloves or wash your hands
                                         frequently when servicing this vessel.
                                         For more information go to
                                         www.P65warnings.ca.gov/marine

























                        Read this manual carefully before operating this boat. This manual should stay
                        with the boat if it is sold.]]></page><page Index="3"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 2  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM






                        IMPORTANT PRODUCT INFORMATION

                        The United States Export Control
                        You will recognize that the Product is manufactured in the United States. Therefore, you may
                        not use, export or reexport the Product except as authorized by the United States laws and
                        the laws of the jurisdiction(s) in which the Product was obtained.
                        The Product is subject to the United States export control laws. In particular, but without lim-
                        itation, the Product may not be exported or reexported, whether directly or indirectly:
                        (a) into any U.S. embargoes or economic sanctioned countries or;
                        (b) to anyone on the U.S. Denied Persons List or Entity List or;
                        (c) to anyone on the U.S. Specially Designated Nationals List,
                        Specially Designated Terrorists List or Specially Designated Narcotic Traffickers List.]]></page><page Index="4"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 1  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Important manual information

                                  To the owner
                        Thank you for choosing a Yamaha boat. This
                        owner’s/operator’s manual contains informa-
                        tion you will need for proper operation, main-
                        tenance, and care. A thorough understanding
                        of these simple instructions will help you to
                        obtain maximum enjoyment from your new
                        Yamaha. If you have any questions about the
                        operation or maintenance of  your boat,
                        please consult a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                        In this manual, information of particular im-
                        portance  is distinguished in the following
                        ways:

                            This is the safety alert symbol. It is used
                        to alert you to potential personal injury haz-
                        ards. Obey all safety messages that follow
                        this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.
                             WARNING
                        A WARNING indicates a hazardous situa-
                        tion which, if not avoided, could result in
                        death or serious injury.

                         NOTICE
                        A NOTICE  indicates special precautions
                        that must be taken to avoid damage to the
                        boat or other property.

                        TIP:
                        A TIP provides key information to make pro-
                        cedures easier or clearer.

                        Because Yamaha has a policy of continuing
                        product improvement, this product may not
                        be exactly as described in this owner’s/oper-
                        ator’s manual. Specifications are subject to
                        change without notice.
                        This manual should be considered a perma-
                        nent part of this boat and should remain with
                        it even if the boat is subsequently sold.]]></page><page Index="5"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 2  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                    Important manual information

                                               Use of your engine data
                        This is a brief summary of how Yamaha (Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd., and Yamaha Motor Corpo-
                        ration, U.S.A.) uses your engine data. For more details, please review our Privacy Policy.
                        https://yamaha-motor.com/privacy-policy

                        What engine data we collect? and How we collect your engine data?
                        This boat collects three types of engine data through integrated Engine Control Units (ECU).:
                        (1) Hull Identification Number (HIN); (2) live data showing the performance of the boat such as
                        engine/motor operating state, boat speed, mileage; and (3) other data showing the status of
                        the boat such as diagnostic trouble code (DTC).
                        The collected data will be uploaded to server at Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd. by attaching a special
                        Yamaha diagnostic tool to the boat, only when maintenance checks or service procedures are
                        performed.

                        How will we use your engine data?
                        Yamaha use collected data from your boat, (1) to conduct adequate maintenance service in-
                        cluding diagnostics, (2) to implement proper warranty claim judgement, (3) to conduct re-
                        search and development of boat, (4) to provide and improve quality of products, features, and
                        services, (5) to ensure our business purpose, and (6) to comply with requirements of laws and
                        regulations.

                        How we disclose your engine data?
                        We may make your engine data available with: (i) our subsidiaries, affiliates, and business part-
                        ners; (ii) dealers in your country or region, and (iii) contractors within the scope necessary to
                        achieve the purpose of use described above.

                        How long will we retain your engine data?
                        We will retain your engine data for the shortest period of time possible/the time necessary to
                        achieve the above listed purposes.

                        How to contact us?
                        Any questions or complaints regarding the processing of your engine data can be submitted
                        in writing to:
                        Yamaha Motor Corporation, U.S.A.
                        Attn: Privacy Office
                        6555 Katella Avenue Cypress, California 90630-5101]]></page><page Index="6"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 3  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Important manual information

                        The SOLE PURPOSE of above provided contact information is TO RESPOND DATA
                        PROCESSING INQUIRY AND OTHER KINDS OF INQUIRIES WILL NOT BE RESPONDED.
                        Please provide the following information for the proper handling of your inquiry: (1) Your
                        Name; (2) Your Email Address; (3) Your Country of Residence; and (4) Your HIN. We will
                        use your personal information provided only for the purpose of supporting your data process-
                        ing inquiry.]]></page><page Index="7"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 4  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                    Important manual information

                        FCC Compliance                        RF Exposure Compliance
                        This device complies with part 15 of the FCC  This equipment complies with FCC radiation
                        Rules. Operation is subject to the following  exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
                        two conditions: (1) this device may not cause  environment  and meets the FCC  radio  fre-
                        harmful interference, and (2) this device must  quency (RF)  Exposure Guidelines as this
                        accept  any interference received, including  equipment has very low levels of RF energy.
                        interference that may cause undesired oper-
                        ation.
                                                                         AR220 / SX220
                        This equipment has been tested and found to
                                                                      222S / 222SE / 222SD
                        comply with the limits for a Class B digital de-  OWNER’S/OPERATOR’S MANUAL
                        vice, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules.  ©2026 by Yamaha Motor Corporation,
                        These limits are designed to provide reason-         U.S.A.
                        able protection against harmful interference  1st Edition, April 2025
                                                                       All rights reserved.
                        in a residential installation. This equipment
                                                                Any reprinting or unauthorized use
                        generates, uses, and can radiate radio fre-  without the written permission of
                        quency energy and may cause harmful inter-  Yamaha Motor Corporation, U.S.A.
                        ference to radio communications if not       is expressly prohibited.
                        installed and used in accordance with the in-   Printed in U.S.A.
                                                                       P/N LIT-18626-15-85
                        structions.  However, there  is no guarantee
                        that interference will not occur in a particular
                        installation. If  this equipment does  cause
                        harmful interference to radio or television re-
                        ception, which can be determined by turning
                        the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
                        aged to try to correct the interference by one
                        of the following measures:
                         Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
                         Increase the separation between  the
                          equipment and the receiver.
                         Connect the equipment into an outlet that
                          is on a different circuit from the GPS de-
                          vice.
                         Consult the dealer  or an  experienced  ra-
                          dio/TV technician for help.

                        FCC CAUTION
                        Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
                        proved by the party responsible for compli-
                        ance  could void the  user’s authority  to
                        operate the equipment.]]></page><page Index="8"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 1  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Table of contents

                        General and important labels...........1  Engine components.................... 39
                          Identification number records..........1  Engine components.................... 40
                                                                 Engine components.................... 41
                            Primary Identification (PRI-ID)
                             number.......................................1
                            Hull Identification Number (HIN) ...1  Control function operation............. 42
                            Engine serial numbers...................2  Boat control functions ................... 42
                          Emission control information ...........3  Engine shut-off switch................ 42
                            Approval labels of emission          Batteries and battery switches ... 42
                             control certificate .......................3  Main switches
                            Manufactured date labels               (AR220 / SX220 / 222S)........... 44
                             (1050 cc engine models)............5  Main switch (222SE / 222SD) ..... 44
                            Manufactured date labels             “START/STOP” buttons
                             (1800 cc / 1900 cc engine             (222SE / 222SD) ...................... 45
                             models) ......................................5  Remote control levers................. 45
                            Star labels (4-star models) ............5  Throttle/shift paddles (222SD).... 47
                          Important labels ...............................8  Steering ...................................... 48
                            Warning labels ............................10  Tilt lever ...................................... 49
                            Other labels.................................14
                                                              Instrument operation ....................... 50
                        Safety information.............................15  Helm controls (AR220 / SX220) ..... 50
                          Limitations on who may operate         Switches ..................................... 51
                            the boat.......................................15  Switch circuit breakers ............... 51
                                                                 No-wake mode / cruise assist
                          Cruising limitations.........................16
                                                                   switch ...................................... 52
                          Operational requirements ..............17
                                                                 Operating the boat at a steady
                          Required equipment.......................18  speed (cruise assist) ................ 52
                          Additional equipment                   Operating the boat with a
                            recommendations .......................19  minimal wake (no-wake
                                                                   mode)....................................... 53
                          Hazard information.........................19
                                                                 Operating the boat in reverse
                          Boat characteristics .......................20
                                                                   with more thrust (reverse RPM
                          Night operation ..............................21  control)..................................... 53
                          Wakeboarding and water-skiing ....21  Stereo system................................ 54
                          Rules of the road............................22  Multi-function display unit
                          Seating locations............................27  operation.................................. 54
                                                               Multi-function display elements..... 55
                          To get more boating safety
                                                                 Static bar .................................... 55
                            information ..................................28
                                                                 Center display............................. 56
                          Enjoy your boat responsibly...........28
                                                                 Screen tab bar ............................ 56
                                                                 Warning icon bar ........................ 57
                        Description.......................................29  Home screen ................................. 58
                          Boat glossary .................................29  Trip screen..................................... 58
                          Location of main components .......30  Setting screen................................ 59
                            Exterior components...................30  Time setting screen .................... 60
                            Seats & interior components.......32  Depth alarm setting screen......... 60
                            Stern components ......................35  Unit setting screen...................... 60
                            Helm components.......................36  Brightness setting screen........... 60]]></page><page Index="9"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 2  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                       Table of contents

                            Maintenance setting screen........61  Setting screen................................ 85
                            Language setting screen.............61  Time setting screen .................... 85
                            Satellite status.............................61  Depth alarm setting screen......... 85
                            Factory reset screen ...................61  Unit setting screen...................... 86
                          Warnings ........................................63  Brightness setting screen........... 86
                            Check engine warning ................64  Maintenance setting screen ....... 86
                            Low oil pressure warning............64  Language setting screen ............ 87
                            Over temperature warning ..........64  Tuner Region setting screen....... 87
                            Battery voltage warning ..............65  Auto Volume setting screen........ 87
                            Communication error warning ....65   Factory reset screen................... 87
                            Low fuel level warning.................65  Warnings........................................ 88
                            Depth warning.............................65  Check engine warning ................ 89
                          Helm controls (222S)......................66  Low oil pressure warning............ 89
                            Switch panel ...............................67  Over temperature warning.......... 89
                          Multi-function display unit            Battery voltage warning.............. 90
                            operation.....................................67  Communication error warning .... 90
                                                                 Low fuel level warning ................ 90
                            Touching the multi-function
                             display......................................67  Depth warning ............................ 90
                            Using the joystick........................67  Helm controls (222SE / 222SD) ..... 91
                          Operation buttons ..........................69  Switch panel ............................... 92
                                                               Multi-function display unit
                            Controller ....................................69
                            Operating the boat at a steady       operation..................................... 93
                             speed (cruise assist) ................69  Touching the multi-function
                            Operating the boat with a              display ..................................... 93
                             minimal wake (no-wake               Using the joystick ....................... 93
                             mode).......................................70  Operation buttons.......................... 94
                            Operating the boat in reverse        Controller.................................... 94
                             with more thrust (reverse RPM       Operating the boat at a steady
                             control).....................................70  speed (cruise assist) ................ 94
                          Multi-function display elements.....72  Operating the boat with a
                            Static bar.....................................73  minimal wake (no-wake
                            Center display.............................74  mode)....................................... 95
                            Screen tab bar ............................74  Operating the boat in reverse
                            Status indicator bar.....................75  with more thrust (reverse RPM
                          Home screen..................................76  control)..................................... 96
                          Map screen ....................................76  Multi-function display elements..... 97
                            Waypoint.....................................77  Screen tab bar ............................ 99
                            Track ...........................................77  Status indicator bar .................. 100
                            Map settings screen....................78  Operation mode........................ 101
                          Trip screen .....................................80  Home screen ............................... 102
                          Media screen..................................81  Map screen.................................. 102
                            Radio screen (AM/FM) ................82  Waypoint................................... 103
                            Weather screen...........................82  Track......................................... 103
                            Bluetooth screen.........................83  Map settings screen ................. 104
                            Auxiliary screen...........................83  Trip screen................................... 106
                            Zone control screen....................84  Drive control screen..................... 107
                          System control screen ...................84]]></page><page Index="10"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 3  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Table of contents

                          Media screen................................108  Stowable table
                            Radio screen (AM/FM) ..............109  (except for AR220 / SX220) ... 126
                            Weather screen.........................110  Glove compartment (AR220 /
                            Bluetooth screen.......................110  SX220) ................................... 127
                            Auxiliary screen.........................110  Glove compartment
                            Zone control screen..................111  (except for AR220 / SX220) ... 127
                          System control screen .................111  Wet storage compartment........ 128
                                                                 Stern storage compartments.... 128
                          Setting screen ..............................112
                                                               Walk-through ............................... 129
                            Time setting screen...................113
                            Depth alarm setting screen.......113  Front walk-through ................... 129
                            Unit setting screen....................113  Rear walk-through .................... 129
                            Brightness setting screen .........113  Windshield ................................... 129
                            Maintenance setting screen......114  Anchor light
                            Language setting screen...........114  (except for SX220) .................... 130
                            Tuner Region setting screen .....114  Anchor light (SX220) .................... 131
                            Auto Volume setting screen......115  Bow ladder................................... 133
                            Factory reset screen .................115
                          Warnings ......................................116  Swim platform.............................. 134
                                                                 Stern ladder .............................. 134
                            Check engine warning ..............117
                            Low oil pressure warning..........117  Remote control keypad
                            Over temperature warning ........117   (except for AR220 / SX220) ... 135
                            Battery voltage warning ............118  Accessory outlet....................... 135
                            Communication error                Side table..................................... 135
                             warning ..................................118  USB chargers .............................. 136
                            Low fuel level warning...............118  Wireless charger .......................... 137
                            Depth warning...........................118  Wakeboard tower
                                                                 (except for SX220) .................... 138
                        Equipment operation ....................119
                                                                 Collapsing and setting up the
                          Seats ............................................119  wakeboard tower................... 138
                            Driver’s seat ..............................119  Bimini top (except for SX220) ...... 139
                            Passenger’s seat                     Setting up the bimini top .......... 139
                             (except for AR220 / SX220) ...120   Storing the bimini top ............... 141
                            Swim platform seat                   Trailering with the bimini top .... 142
                             (except for AR220 / SX220) ...120   Removing the bimini top........... 142
                            Underwater seats/tables...........121  Installing the bimini top............. 143
                          Engine hood.................................122  Bimini top (SX220) ....................... 143
                          Storage compartments ................122  Setting up the bimini top .......... 143
                            Anchor storage compartment...122     Storing the bimini top in the
                            Front underseat storage                upright position...................... 144
                             compartments........................123  Storing the bimini top in the
                            Ski locker ..................................123  fully collapsed position.......... 145
                            Rear underseat storage               Trailering with the bimini top .... 145
                             compartment (starboard) .......124  Removing the bimini top........... 146
                            Rear underseat storage               Installing the bimini top............. 146
                             compartment (port) ................124
                            Enclosed head compartment....124
                            Driver’s side console
                             compartment..........................125]]></page><page Index="11"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 4  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                       Table of contents

                        Operation and handling                   Fuel level check ........................ 167
                        requirements....................................147
                          Fuel requirement ..........................147  Operation......................................... 169
                            Fuel ...........................................147  Driving your boat ......................... 169
                          Engine oil requirement .................148  Getting to know your boat........ 169
                            Engine oil...................................148  Learning to operate your
                          Draining the bilge water ...............152  boat........................................ 169
                                                                 Starting the engines.................. 169
                            Draining the bilge water on
                             land ........................................152  Stopping the engines................ 173
                            Draining the bilge water on          Leaving a dock ......................... 174
                             water ......................................153  Turning the boat ....................... 174
                                                                 Boating with passengers .......... 176
                                                                 Stopping the boat..................... 176
                        First-time operation ........................155
                                                                 Boarding from the water........... 177
                          Engine break-in                        Boarding from the bow............. 177
                            (AR220 / SX220)........................155  Boarding from a dock or
                          Engine break-in (except for              landing jetty ........................... 178
                                                                 Docking..................................... 178
                            AR220 / SX220).........................155
                                                                 Beaching................................... 179
                                                                 Anchoring ................................. 180
                        Pre-operation checks ...................156  Crossing wakes and swells ...... 180
                            Pre-operation checklist.............156  Post-operation checks ................ 181
                          Pre-operation check points..........157
                            Pre-launch checks ....................157  Trailering.......................................... 183
                            Steering system checks............157  Trailering the boat........................ 183
                            Remote control lever checks ....157
                            Throttle/shift paddle checks         Hitch ......................................... 183
                             (222SE)...................................158  Trailering checklist.................... 183
                            Fire extinguisher check.............158  Backing your trailer................... 184
                            Access port cap check .............160  Launching ................................. 185
                            Jet intake checks ......................160  Loading..................................... 185
                            Fuel system checks ..................160  Lifting........................................ 186
                            Engine oil level check................161
                            Battery check............................162  Care and storage............................ 187
                            Bilge water check......................162  Post-operation care..................... 187
                            Drain plug check .......................162  Flushing the cooling system..... 187
                            Blower check (AR220 /                Cleaning the boat ..................... 188
                             SX220)....................................162  Basic stain guide ...................... 190
                            Blower checks                        Chil Cool Technology vinyl
                             (except for AR220 / SX220) ...163     upholstery Cleaning & Care... 191
                            Navigation and anchor lights         Battery care .............................. 191
                             checks....................................164  Long-term storage....................... 192
                            Horn check................................166  Fuel system............................... 192
                            Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)       Lubrication................................ 192
                             check .....................................166  Grease points ........................... 192
                            Post-launch checks ..................166
                            Engine shut-off switch check....167
                            Cooling water pilot outlet
                             check .....................................167]]></page><page Index="12"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 5  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Table of contents

                        Maintenance ....................................195
                          Maintenance.................................195
                            Owner’s/operator’s manual ......195
                            Removing and installing the
                             engine covers (except for
                             AR220 / SX220)......................195
                            Periodic maintenance chart ......197

                        Specifications................................200
                          Specifications (1050 cc engine
                            models) .....................................200
                          Specifications (1800 cc / 1900 cc
                            engine models)..........................202

                        Trouble recovery .............................206
                          Troubleshooting ...........................206
                            Troubleshooting chart...............206
                          Emergency procedures................209
                            Jet pump clean-out
                             procedure...............................209
                            Raising the shift gates
                             (222SE / 222SD).....................211
                            Power steering system will not
                             operate (222SD) .....................212
                            Jump-starting............................213
                            Fuse replacement (AR220 /
                             SX220 / 222S) ........................214
                            Fuse replacement
                             (except for AR220 / SX220 /
                             222S)......................................217
                            Running on one engine .............219
                            Towing the boat ........................220

                        Consumer information....................221
                          Limited warranty ..........................221
                          YAMAHA EXTENDED SERVICE
                            (Y.E.S.) ......................................223
                          Sample float plan .........................224

                        Index...............................................225]]></page><page Index="13"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 1  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                      General and important labels

                         Identification number records        1900 cc engine models
                        Record your Primary  Identification (PRI-ID)
                        number, Hull Identification Number (HIN), and
                        engine serial numbers in the spaces provided
                        to assist you in ordering spare  parts  from
                        your Yamaha Boat Dealer. Also, record and
                        keep these ID numbers in a separate place in
                        case your boat is stolen.                                             1

                        Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number
                        The PRI-ID number is stamped on a label at-
                        tached inside the engine compartment. (See  1  Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number
                        page 122 for engine hood opening and clos-
                        ing procedures.)
                        1050 cc engine models






                                                                                PRI-I.D.
                                                               MODEL
                                                               YAMAHA MOTOR CO.,LTD.
                                                               ASSEMBLED IN U.S.A. WITH FOREIGN & DOMESTIC
                                                               COMPONENTS.
                                                   1           ASSEMBLÉ EN U.S. AVEC DES COMPOSANTS ÉTRANGERS ET
                                                               DOMESTIQUES.
                        1  Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number  Hull Identification Number (HIN)
                                                              The HIN is stamped into the right rear corner
                        1800 cc engine models                 of the hull.
                                                                                              1







                                                       1
                                                               YAMC

                        1  Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number
                                                              1  Hull Identification Number (HIN)





                                                                                                1]]></page><page Index="14"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 2  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        General and important labels

                        Engine serial numbers                 1900 cc engine models
                        The engine serial numbers are stamped on a
                        label attached to each engine unit. (See page
                        122  for engine  hood opening and  closing
                        procedures.)
                        1050 cc engine models
                                                 1
                                                                          1



                                                              1  Engine serial number
                                                              Port side



                        1  Engine serial number
                                                                 YAMAHA
                        1800 cc engine models


                                                               YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
                                                               MADE IN JAPAN
                                         1                     PAYS D’ORIGINE JAPON






                                                              Starboard side

                        1  Engine serial number

                                                                 YAMAHA




                                                               YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
                                                               MADE IN JAPAN
                                                               PAYS D’ORIGINE JAPON








                        2]]></page><page Index="15"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 3  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                      General and important labels

                          Emission control information        1800 cc engine models
                        These engines conform to U.S. Environmen-             1
                        tal Protection Agency (EPA) and/or California
                        Air Resources Board (CARB) regulations for
                        marine SI engines applicable at the time of
                        manufacture.
                        The 4-star labels are affixed to models that
                        meet  the Air Resources Board’s emission
                        standards for 4-star models. (See page 5 for
                        information on the star labels.)
                        Star labels are not affixed to 3-star models.
                        These engines are certified to operate on reg-  1  Emission control information label
                        ular unleaded gasoline.
                                                              1900 cc engine models
                        Approval labels of emission control
                        certificate
                        These labels are attached to each engine unit
                        and to the inside of the engine compartment.
                        (See page 122 for engine hood opening and
                        closing procedures and page 195 for engine
                        cover removal and installation procedures.)
                        1050 cc engine models                                      1


                                                              1  Emission control information label
                                                    1
                                                              3-star models
                                                               EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
                                                               THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO           MY U.S. EPA EXHAUST REGULATIONS FOR SI
                                                               MARINE ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR MAINTENANCE
                                                               SPECIFICATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS.
                                                               ENGINE FAMILY :  DISPLACEMENT :                     liters MAX POWER :                         kW
                                                               EPA FEL : HC+NOx               , CO                g/kW-hr
                                                               YAMAHA MOTOR CO.,LTD.
                        1  Emission control information label  4-star models

                                                               EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
                                                               THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO          MY CALIFORNIA AND U.S. EPA EXHAUST
                                                               REGULATIONS FOR SI MARINE ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR
                                                               MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS.
                                                               ENGINE FAMILY :  DISPLACEMENT :                 liters MAX POWER :                    kW
                                                               EPA  FEL : HC+NOx                  , CO                 g/kW-hr  CA  FEL : HC+NOx                                     g/kW-hr
                                                               YAMAHA MOTOR CO.,LTD.





                                                                                                3]]></page><page Index="16"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 4  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        General and important labels

                        1050 cc engine models                 3-star models

                                                              EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM INFORMATION
                                                              THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO       U.S. EPA EXHAUST REGULATIONS FOR SI MARINE
                                                              ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS AND
                                                              ADJUSTMENTS. MEETS U.S. EPA EVAP STANDARDS USING CERTIFIED COMPONENTS.
                                                              ENGINE FAMILY:  DISPLACEMENT:        liters  MAX POWER:             kW
                                                              EPA FEL: HC+NOx             ,CO             g/kW-hr
                                                              EPA CERTIFIED EVAP COMPONENTS:
                                                              YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
                                                              4-star models
                                                   1          EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM INFORMATION  TWC/HO25/MFI/OBD/EECS
                                                              THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO       CALIFORNIA AND U.S. EPA EXHAUST REGULATIONS
                                                              FOR SI MARINE ENGINES. REFER TO OWNER’S MANUAL FOR MAINTENANCE
                                                              SPECIFICATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS. MEETS U.S. EPA EVAP STANDARDS USING
                                                              CERTIFIED COMPONENTS. MEETS        MY CALIFORNIA EVAP EMISSIONS.
                                                              REGULATIONS FOR SPARK-IGNITION MARINE WATERCRAFT.
                                                              ENGINE FAMILY:  DISPLACEMENT:            liters  MAX POWER:                 kW
                                                              EPA FEL: HC+NOx                  ,CO             g/kW-h CA FEL: HC+NOx                                     g/kW-hr
                        1  Emission control information label  EPA CERTIFIED EVAP COMPONENTS:
                                                              ARB EVAP FAMILY:  ARB EVAP EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM:
                                                              YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
                        1800 cc engine models






                                                   1



                        1  Emission control information label

                        1900 cc engine models









                                                         1



                        1  Emission control information label








                        4]]></page><page Index="17"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 5  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                      General and important labels

                        Manufactured date labels              1800 cc engine models
                        (1050 cc engine models)                                         1
                        These labels are attached to each port sides
                        of the air filter case. (See page 122 for engine
                        hood opening and closing procedures.)






                                                      1

                                                              1  Manufactured date label
                                                              1900 cc engine models


                        1  Manufactured date label







                                                                             1

                        Manufactured date labels
                                                              1  Manufactured date label
                        (1800 cc / 1900 cc engine models)
                        These labels are attached to each engine
                        unit. (See page 122 for engine hood opening
                        and closing procedures and page 195 for en-
                        gine cover removal  and installation  proce-
                        dures.)



                                                              Star labels (4-star models)
                                                              This boat is labeled with a California Air Re-
                                                              sources Board (CARB) star label. See below
                                                              for a description of your particular label.









                                                                                                5]]></page><page Index="18"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 6  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        General and important labels




                               1











                        1  Star label location
                                                              Two Stars - Very Low Emission
                                                              The two-star label  identifies engines  that
                                                              meet the Air Resources Board’s Personal
                                    1
                                                              Watercraft and Outboard marine engine 2004
                                                              exhaust emission standards. Engines meet-
                                                              ing these standards have 20% lower emis-
                                                              sions than One Star-Low Emission engines.






                        1  Star label location

                        One Star - Low Emission
                        The one-star label identifies engines that
                        meet the Air Resources Board’s Personal
                        Watercraft and Outboard marine engine 2001
                        exhaust emission standards. Engines meet-
                        ing these standards have 75% lower emis-
                                                              Three Stars - Ultra Low Emission
                        sions than conventional carbureted two-
                                                              The three-star label identifies engines that
                        stroke engines. These engines are equivalent
                                                              meet the Air Resources Board’s Personal
                        to the U.S. EPA’s 2006 standards for marine
                                                              Watercraft and Outboard marine engine 2008
                        engines.
                                                              exhaust emission standards or the Sterndrive
                                                              and Inboard marine engine 2003-2008 ex-
                                                              haust emission standards. Engines meeting
                                                              these standards have 65% lower emissions
                                                              than One Star-Low Emission engines.






                        6]]></page><page Index="19"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 7  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                      General and important labels


















                        Four Stars - Super Ultra Low Emission
                        The four-star label identifies engines  that
                        meet the Air Resources Board’s  Sterndrive
                        and Inboard  marine engine 2009 exhaust
                        emission standards. Personal Watercraft and
                        Outboard marine engines may also comply
                        with these standards. Engines meeting these
                        standards have 90% lower emissions  than
                        One Star-Low Emission engines.


































                                                                                                7]]></page><page Index="20"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 8  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        General and important labels

                                                   Important labels
                        Read the following labels before operating this boat. If you need any additional information,
                        contact a Yamaha Boat Dealer.

                           16    11              11                            19
                                                                     5










                           6          4                         16
                                            2       14






                                15 3 1

                                                          12
                               11                                                      11











                               AR220/SX220         Except for AR220/SX220
                               3-star models       3-star models       4-star models
                                                                                      17





                                            17       17





                        8]]></page><page Index="21"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 9  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                      General and important labels






                                                                           13


















                                             10

























                                            7        9    18        8        7











                                                                                                9]]></page><page Index="22"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 10  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        General and important labels

                        Warning labels
                        If any of these labels is damaged or missing, contact a Yamaha Boat Dealer for a replacement.
                           1

























                           2
















                           3








                                                              F3A-U415P-20




                        10]]></page><page Index="23"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 11  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                      General and important labels


                          4












                          5









                          6


                               Visibility from the seated position at this helm
                                     station is limited.
                             Operation from a standing position may be necessary.
                               Avoid serious injury or death from collisions.
                                Maintain a lookout as required by USCG
                                     Navigation Rules.
                                    Read owners manual.
                          7
























                                                                                               11]]></page><page Index="24"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 12  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        General and important labels


                          8













                                                                    F3A-U415R-40
                          9













                          10





                                                                A
                                                                 B


                            Check cap – if handle is not parallel to centerline of boat or a strong pull will
                            move cap, it is not locked securely and could be forced out by water pressure.
                                                                                          F6D-U411D-00
                          11                                   12















                        12]]></page><page Index="25"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 13  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                      General and important labels



                          13







                                                          F1C-U416B-20
                           14
                           Except for SX220
















































                                                                                               13]]></page><page Index="26"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 14  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        General and important labels

                        Other labels

                           15

                           MAXIMUM CAPACITIES
                             10    PERSONS OR 1860   LBS.

                                2200 LBS, PERSONS, GEAR
                           THIS BOAT COMPLIES WITH U.S. COAST GUARD SAFETY
                           STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF CERTIFICATION
                           MEETS U.S. EPA EVAP STANDARDS USING CERTIFIED COMPONENTS
                           MANUFACTURER: YAMAHA JET BOAT MANUFACTURING U.S.A., INC.
                           MODEL:                   VONORE, TN
                            DESIGN COMPLIANCE WITH NMMA REQUIREMENTS IS VERIFIED.
                            MANUFACTURER RESPONSIBLE FOR PRODUCTION CONTROL.



                           16





                           17

                            All applicable electrical system components installed as
                            original equipment meet appropriate U.S.C.G. requirements
                            for ignition protection. (Ref. 33 CFR 183.410 and 183.440)
                             YAMAHA                    60E-83627-00

                           18                              19 AR220/SX220























                        14]]></page><page Index="27"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 15  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                                                                  Limitations on who may
                        The safe use and operation of this boat is    operate the boat
                        dependent upon the use of proper operat-   Yamaha recommends a minimum operator
                        ing techniques, as well as upon the com-  age of 16 years old.
                        mon sense, good judgment, and expertise  Adults must supervise use by minors.
                        of the operator. Every operator should  Know the operator age and training re-
                        know the following  requirements  before  quirements for your state. A boating safety
                        operating the boat.                    course is recommended  and may be  re-
                         Before operating the boat, read the own-  quired in your state. You can find local rules
                          er’s/operator’s manual,  the Operation  In-  by contacting the United States Coast
                          struction card, and all labels on the boat.  Guard (USCG), the National Association of
                          These materials should give you an under-  State Boating Law Administrators, or your
                          standing of the boat and its operation.  local Power Squadron.
                         Never allow anyone to  operate this boat   This boat is designed to carry the operator,
                          until they too have read this owner’s/oper-  up to 9 passengers, and cargo. Never ex-
                          ator’s manual, the Operation Instruction  ceed the maximum load limit or allow more
                          card, and all labels.                than 10 persons (or 9 persons if a wake-
                                                               boarder or water-skier is being pulled) to
                                                               ride in the boat at any time. Weight distri-
                                                               bution affects performance. Keep weight in
                                                               the boat low and evenly distributed from
                                                               side-to-side  and bow-to-stern. Remove
                                                               any unnecessary cargo and store it on
                                                               shore.

                                                                Maximum load:
                                                                  Total  weight  of cargo, operator, and
                                                                  passengers:
                                                                    998 kg (2200 lb)
                                                                  Total weight of operator and passen-
                                                                  gers:
                                                                    843 kg (1860 lb)
















                                                                                               15]]></page><page Index="28"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 16  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                            Safety information

                               Cruising limitations            This is a high-performance boat—not a toy.
                         Scan  constantly for people, objects,  and  Sharp turns or jumping wakes or waves
                          other watercraft. Be alert for conditions  can increase the risk of back/spinal injury
                          that limit your visibility or block your vision  (paralysis), facial injuries, and broken legs,
                          of others.                           ankles, and other  bones. Do not jump
                                                               wakes or waves.
                                                               Do not  operate  the boat  in rough water,
                                                               bad weather, or when visibility is poor; this
                                                               may lead to an accident causing injury or
                                                               death. Be alert to the possibility of adverse
                                                               weather. Take note of  weather  forecasts
                                                               and the prevailing weather conditions be-
                                                               fore setting out in your boat.
                                                               Never operate in water that is less than
                         Operate defensively at safe speeds and  90 cm (3 ft) deep from the bottom of the
                          keep a safe distance from people, objects,  boat, otherwise you increase your chance
                          and other watercraft.                of hitting a submerged object, which could
                         Do not follow directly behind other water-  result in injury.
                          craft.
                         Do not go near others to spray or splash
                          them with water.
                         Avoid sharp turns or other maneuvers that
                          make it hard for others to avoid you or un-
                          derstand where you are going.                    90 cm (3 ft)
                         Avoid  areas with  submerged objects or
                          shallow water.
                         Take early action to avoid collisions. Re-
                          member, boats do not have brakes.
                         Do not pull the remote control levers back   Leave a “float plan” with a responsible per-
                          to idle when trying to steer away from ob-  son on shore. Tell where you plan to go and
                          jects—you need throttle to steer. Always  when you plan to arrive, and provide a de-
                          check throttle, shift, and steering controls  scription of your boat. Advise this person if
                          for proper operation before starting boat.  your plans change and also when you ar-
                         Operate within your limits and avoid ag-  rive to prevent false alarms. A sample float
                          gressive maneuvers to reduce the risk of  plan is included on page 224.
                          loss of control, ejection, and collision.   Follow navigation rules and state and local
                                                               laws that apply to your boat.








                        16]]></page><page Index="29"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 17  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                           Operational requirements            Attach the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) to
                         The operator and all passengers must wear  the PFD and keep it free from the steering
                          a U.S. Coast Guard (USCG) approved per-  wheel or other controls so that the engines
                          sonal flotation device (PFD).        stop if the operator accidentally leaves the
                                                               helm. Failure to attach the engine shut-off
                                                1              cord (lanyard) could  result in a runaway
                                                               boat if the operator is ejected.
                                                               After operation, remove the engine shut-off
                                                               cord (lanyard) and the main switch keys to
                                                               avoid accidental starting or unauthorized
                                                               use by children or others.

                                                              AR220 / SX220 / 222S


                        1  PFD                                             1

                         Eye protection is recommended to keep
                          wind, water, and glare from the sun out of                2
                          your eyes while you operate your boat. Re-
                          straining straps for eyewear are made
                          which are designed to  float should  your
                          eyewear fall in the water.
                         Never operate the boat after consuming al-
                          cohol or taking drugs.              1  Engine shut-off switch
                                                              2  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                         For reasons of safety and proper care of
                          the boat, always perform the pre-operation
                                                              222SE / 222SD
                          checks listed on page 156 before operating
                          the boat.
                         Passengers must always sit in a designat-
                          ed seating area, place  feet  on the deck,                 2
                          and hold on to the handgrips, handrails, or
                          straps when the boat is in motion.
                         Always consult your doctor on whether it is    1
                          safe for you to ride in this boat if you are
                          pregnant or in poor health.
                         Do not attempt to modify this boat.
                          Modifications  to  your boat may reduce
                                                              1  Engine shut-off switch
                          safety and reliability, and render the boat
                                                              2  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                          unsafe or illegal to use.




                                                                                               17]]></page><page Index="30"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 18  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                            Safety information

                         Scan  constantly  for swimmers and stay   Required equipment
                          away from swimming areas. Swimmers are  The  U.S. Coast Guard  (USCG) has  regula-
                          hard to see and you could accidentally hit  tions which describe minimum standards of
                          someone in the water.               safety. You must comply with these regula-
                         Avoid being hit by another boat. You  tions, which  apply to boats like your boat
                          should always take responsibility to watch  which are less than 26 feet long.
                          for traffic; other boaters may not be watch-   Personal flotation devices (PFD):
                          ing for you. If they do not see you, or you  Type I, II, or III as required for all people on
                          maneuver more quickly than other boaters  board (see “Operational requirements” for
                          expect, you risk a collision.        more information), plus at least one Type IV
                         Maintain a safe distance from other boats  (throwable type).
                          and watercraft, and  also watch  for  ski   Fire extinguisher:
                          ropes or fishing lines. Obey the “Rules of  At least one 5-B (B-1) type hand-held por-
                          the road”, and be sure to check behind you  table fire extinguisher.
                          before  making a turn.  (See  “Rules of the   Visual distress signals:
                          road” on page 22.)                   It is recommended that a USCG-approved
                                                               day/night pyrotechnic device be stored on
                                                               your boat. A mirror can also be used as an
                                                               emergency signal. Contact  your  Yamaha
                                                               Boat Dealer or the Coast Guard for more
                                                               information.
                                                               Sound signalling device:
                                                               Your boat is equipped with a horn that can
                                                               be used to signal other boats. See “Rules
                                                               of the road” for more information.
                                                               Navigation lights:
                                                               Your boat is equipped  with navigation
                                                               lights for use between sunset and sunrise,
                                                               and during periods of reduced visibility,
                                                               such as fog. Be sure these lights are work-
                                                               ing and  are turned on when  necessary.
                                                               (See pages 84, 111, and 130 for more infor-
                                                               mation.)














                        18]]></page><page Index="31"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 19  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                              Additional equipment                  Hazard information
                                recommendations                Never start the engines or let them run for
                        The following equipment can help make your  any length of time in an enclosed area. Ex-
                        boating experience safer and more enjoy-  haust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a
                        able:                                  colorless, odorless gas that may cause
                         Mooring fenders and lines.           loss of consciousness and death within a
                         Anchor with suitable line (a “Danforth” type  short time. Always operate the boat in an
                          anchor and line that is at least 6 times the  open area.
                          depth of the water where you will drop an-  It is also important to have the engines off
                          chor are recommended).               when anyone is using the ladder on models
                         Manual-type bilge pump.              equipped with one because of the carbon
                         First-aid kit.                       monoxide in the exhaust gases coming
                         Waterproof flashlight with extra batteries.  from underneath the step.
                         Tool kit with assorted screwdrivers, pliers,   Do not touch the hot muffler or engine dur-
                          wrenches (including metric  sizes), and  ing or immediately after engine operation;
                          electrical tape.                     they can cause serious burns.
                         Oar  or paddle  (look  for one with a  boat
                          hook on the other end).
                         Spare parts, such as fuses.
                         Navigation charts for the waters where you
                          will be boating.
                         Tow-rope.































                                                                                               19]]></page><page Index="32"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 20  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                            Safety information

                              Boat characteristics             Keep away from the intake grates while the
                         Jet thrust turns the boat. Moving the re-  engines  are on. Items such as  long  hair,
                          mote control levers completely back to idle  loose clothing, or PFD straps can become
                          or the neutral position produces only mini-  entangled in moving parts, resulting in se-
                          mum thrust. If you are traveling at speeds  vere injury or drowning.
                          above  trolling, you will have rapidly de-   Never insert any object into the jet thrust
                          creasing ability to steer without throttle.  nozzles while the engines are running. Se-
                          You may still have some turning ability im-  vere injury or death could result from com-
                          mediately after moving the remote control  ing in contact with the rotating parts of the
                          levers back to idle, but once the engines  jet pumps.
                          slow down, the boat will no longer respond
                          to steering  wheel input until  you apply
                          throttle again or you reach a trolling speed.
                          Practice turning in an open area without
                          obstructions until you have a good feel for                         2
                          the maneuver.
                         This  Yamaha boat is  water-jet propelled.
                          The pumps are directly connected to the       1
                          engines. This means that the jet thrust will
                          produce some  movement whenever  the
                          engines are running. The boat has a “neu-  1  Intake grate
                          tral” position, but since the boat is always  2  Jet thrust nozzle
                          producing thrust while the engines are run-
                          ning, some forward or reverse movement   Stop the engines and remove the clip from
                          may occur.                           the engine shut-off switch before removing
                         Do not use the reverse function  to slow  any debris or weeds, which may have col-
                          down or stop the boat above trolling speed  lected around the jet intakes. (See page
                          as it could cause you to lose control, be  209 for more information.)
                          ejected, or impact the steering wheel  or
                          other parts of the boat. This could increase
                          the risk of serious injury. It could also dam-
                          age the shift mechanisms.
                         Reverse can be used to slow down or stop
                          during slow-speed maneuvering, such as
                          when docking. Once the engines are idling,
                          shift to reverse and gradually increase en-
                          gine speed. Make sure that there are no
                          obstacles  or people behind you before
                          shifting into reverse.





                        20]]></page><page Index="33"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 21  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                                 Night operation                 Wakeboarding and water-
                         When using your boat before dawn or after         skiing
                          dusk, you must have both bow and anchor  You can use the boat to tow a wakeboarder
                          lights  operating. When  at anchor in the  or water-skier, using the tow pylon or the ski
                          dark, the anchor light must be lit. (See pag-  tow hook provided.
                          es 84, 111, and 130 for instructions.)  It is the boat operator’s responsibility to be
                         The  navigation  lights should be replaced  alert to the safety of the wakeboarder or wa-
                          after a certain period of time.     ter-skier and others. Know and follow all state
                          If the navigation light bulb is an incandes-  and local regulations in effect for the waters
                          cent bulb, replace it after 1 year.  in which you will be operating.
                          If the navigation light bulb is LED, replace it  The following are some important consider-
                          every 5 years.                      ations for  minimizing risks while  pulling  a
                         Except for AR220 / SX220: Docking lights  wakeboarder or water-skier.
                          are to be used for low speed, close-quarter   The wakeboarder or water-skier should
                          maneuvering only. Docking  lights  may  wear an approved PFD, preferably a bright-
                          cause temporary blindness in other vessels  ly colored one so boat operators can see
                          when used improperly.                the person being pulled.
                                                               The wakeboarder or water-skier should
                                                               wear protective clothing. Severe internal in-
                                                               juries can occur if water is forced into body
                                                               cavities as a result of falling into the water
                                                               or while reboarding.  Normal swimwear
                                                               does not adequately protect against force-
                                                               ful water entry into the rectum or vagina.
                                                               The  person being pulled should wear  a
                                                               wetsuit bottom or clothing  that provides
                                                               equivalent protection. Such clothing in-
                                                               cludes thick, tightly woven, sturdy, and
                                                               snug-fitting apparel such  as denim,  but
                                                               does not include spandex or similar fab-
                                                               rics, like those used in bicycle shorts.

















                                                                                               21]]></page><page Index="34"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 22  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                            Safety information

                         A second person should be on board as a     Rules of the road
                          spotter to watch the wakeboarder or wa-  Your Yamaha boat is legally considered a
                          ter-skier; in most states, it is required by  powerboat. Operation of the boat must be
                          law. Let the person being pulled direct the  in accordance with the rules and regula-
                          operator’s control of speed and direction  tions governing the waterway on which it
                          with hand signals.  Be sure the seat is  is used.
                          locked in place (see page 119) before get-  Just as there are rules that apply when you
                          ting underway.                      are driving on streets and highways, there are
                         When preparing to pull a wakeboarder or  waterway rules that apply when you are oper-
                          water-skier, operate the boat at the slowest  ating your boat. These rules are used interna-
                          possible speed until the boat is well away  tionally, and are also enforced by the United
                          from the person being pulled and slack in  States Coast Guard and local agencies. You
                          the tow-rope is taken up. Make sure that  should be aware of these rules, and follow
                          the rope is not looped around anything.   them whenever you encounter another vessel
                          After checking that the wakeboarder or wa-  on the water.
                          ter-skier is ready and that there is no traffic  Several sets of rules prevail according to
                          or other obstacles, apply enough throttle to  geographic location, but are all basically the
                          raise the person.                   same as the International Rules of the Road.
                         Make smooth, wide turns. The boat is ca-  The rules presented here in this owner’s/op-
                          pable of very sharp turns, which could ex-  erator’s manual are condensed, and have
                          ceed the  abilities of the wakeboarder  or  been  provided for  your convenience only.
                          water-skier. Keep the person being towed  Consult your local U.S. Coast Guard Auxiliary
                          at least 50 m (164 ft), about twice the dis-  or Department of Motor Vehicles for a com-
                          tance of a standard tow-rope, away from  plete set of rules governing the waters in
                          any potential hazard.               which you will be operating your boat.
                         The operators of boats and other water-  Steering and sailing rules
                          craft may not be aware that you are pulling  Whenever two vessels on the water meet one
                          a wakeboarder or water-skier. Together  another, one vessel has the right-of-way; it is
                          with the  spotter, pay  attention to  others  called the “stand-on” vessel. The vessel that
                          around you and cruise at safe speeds.  does not have the right-of-way is called the
                         Be alert to the hazard of the tow-rope han-  “give-way” or “burdened” vessel. These rules
                          dle  snapping  back at the boat when the  determine which vessel has the right-of-way,
                          wakeboarder or water-skier falls or is un-  and what each vessel should do.
                          able to get up.                     Stand-on vessel
                        See pages 10 and 138 for wakeboard tower  The vessel with the right-of-way has the duty
                        use.                                  to continue its course and speed, except to
                                                              avoid an immediate  collision.  When you
                                                              maintain your direction and speed, the other
                                                              vessel will be able to determine how best to
                                                              avoid you.




                        22]]></page><page Index="35"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 23  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                        Give-way vessel                       In the following illustration, your boat is in the
                        The vessel which does not have the right-of-  center. You should give the right-of-way to
                        way has the duty to take positive and timely  any vessels shown in the white area (you are
                        action to stay out of the way of the stand-on  the give-way vessel). Any vessels in the shad-
                        vessel. Normally, you should not cross in  ed area must yield to you (they are the give-
                        front of the vessel with the right-of-way. You  way vessels). Both you and the meeting ves-
                        should slow down or change directions brief-  sel must alter course to avoid each other.
                        ly  and pass  behind the other vessel. You
                        should always move in such a way that the
                        operator of the other vessel can see what you
                        are doing.
                        The General Prudential  Rule regarding the
                        right-of-way is that if a collision appears un-
                        avoidable, neither boat has the right-of-way.
                        Both boats must avoid the collision.
                        In other words, follow the standard rules ex-
                        cept when a collision will occur unless both
                        vessels try to avoid each other. If that is the
                                                              Meeting
                        case, both vessels become give-way ves-
                                                              If you are meeting another power-driven ves-
                        sels.
                                                              sel head-on, and are close enough to run the
                        Rules when encountering vessels
                                                              risk of collision, neither of you has the right-
                        There are three main situations that you may
                                                              of-way. Both of you should alter course to
                        encounter with other vessels which  could
                                                              avoid an accident. You should keep the other
                        lead to a collision unless the Steering Rules
                                                              vessel on your port (left) side. This rule does
                        are followed:
                                                              not apply if both of you will clear one another
                        Meeting: you are approaching another vessel
                                                              if you continue on your set course and speed.
                        head-on.
                        Crossing: you  are traveling  across another
                        vessel’s path.
                        Overtaking: you are passing or being passed
                        by another vessel.















                                                                                               23]]></page><page Index="36"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 24  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                            Safety information

                        Crossing                              Other special situations
                        When two power-driven vessels are crossing  There are three other rules you  should be
                        each other’s path close enough to run the risk  aware of when operating your boat around
                        of collision, the vessel which has the other on  other vessels.
                        the starboard (right) side must keep out of the  Narrow channels and bends
                        way of the other. If the other vessel is on your  When navigating in narrow channels, you
                        starboard (right) side, you must keep out of  should keep to the right when it is safe and
                        its way; you are the give-way vessel. If the  practical to do so. If the operator of a power-
                        other vessel is on your port (left) side, remem-  driven vessel is preparing to go around a
                        ber that you should maintain course and di-  bend that may obstruct the view of other wa-
                        rection, provided the other vessel gives you  ter vessels, the operator should sound a pro-
                        the right-of-way, as it should.       longed  blast of four to six seconds  on  the
                                                              horn. If another vessel is around the bend, it
                                                              too should sound the horn. Even if no reply is
                                                              heard, however, the vessel should still pro-
                                                              ceed around the bend with caution.
                                                              Fishing vessel right-of-way
                                                              All vessels fishing with nets, lines, or trawls
                                                              are considered to be “fishing vessels” under
                                                              the International Rules. Vessels with trolling
                                                              lines are not considered fishing vessels. Fish-
                                                              ing vessels have the right-of-way regardless
                                                              of position. Fishing vessels cannot, however,
                        Overtaking                            impede the passage of other vessels in nar-
                        If you are passing another vessel, you are the
                                                              row channels.
                        give-way vessel. This means that the other
                                                              Sailing vessel right-of-way
                        vessel is expected to maintain its course and
                                                              Sailing vessels should normally be given the
                        speed. You must stay out of its way until you
                                                              right-of-way. The exceptions to this are:
                        are clear of it. Likewise, if another vessel is
                                                              (1) When the sailing vessel is overtaking the
                        passing you, you should maintain your speed
                                                                 power-driven  vessel, the power-driven
                        and direction so that the other  vessel can
                                                                 vessel has the right-of-way.
                        steer itself around you.
                                                              (2) Sailing vessels should keep clear of any
                                                                 fishing vessel.
                                                              (3) In a  narrow channel, a sailing vessel
                                                                 should not hamper the safe passage of a
                                                                 power-driven vessel that can navigate
                                                                 only in such a channel.
                                                              Reading buoys and other markers
                                                              The waters of the United States are marked
                                                              for safe navigation by the lateral system of
                                                              buoyage. Simply put, buoys and markers
                                                              have an arrangement of shapes, colors, num-


                        24]]></page><page Index="37"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 25  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                        bers, and lights to show which side  of the
                        buoy a boater should pass on when navigat-
                        ing in a particular direction. The markings on
                        these buoys are oriented from the perspec-
                        tive of being entered from seaward (the boat-
                        er is going towards the harbor). Red buoys
                        are passed on your starboard (right) side
                        when proceeding from open water into port,
                        and black buoys are to your port (left) side. An
                        easy  way to  remember  the meaning of the
                        colors  is the phrase “red right returning.”
                        When navigating out of the harbor, your posi-
                        tion with respect to the buoys should be re-
                        versed; red buoys should be  to port and
                        black buoys to starboard.
                        Many bodies of water used by boaters are
                        entirely within the boundaries of a particular
                        state. The Uniform State Waterway Marking
                        System has been devised for these waters.




































                                                                                               25]]></page><page Index="38"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 26  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                            Safety information

                        This system uses buoys and signs with distinctive shapes and colors to show regulatory or
                        advisory information. These markers are white with black letters and orange borders. They
                        signify speed zones, restricted areas, danger areas, and general information.





















































                        Remember, markings may vary by geographic location. Always consult local boating author-
                        ities before riding your boat in unfamiliar waters.




                        26]]></page><page Index="39"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 27  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                     Safety information

                                                   Seating locations
                        Sit in the designated locations while sailing.
                        The seating locations are as follows.


















                          : Seating locations
                          : Do not occupy the stern of the boat when engines are running due to the possibility of car-
                           bon monoxide poisoning and of falling.




































                                                                                               27]]></page><page Index="40"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 28  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                            Safety information

                           To get more boating safety           Enjoy your boat responsibly
                                   information                You share the areas you enjoy when operat-
                        Be informed about boating safety. Additional  ing your boat with others and with nature. So
                        publications and information can be obtained  your enjoyment includes a responsibility  to
                        from many organizations,  including the fol-  treat these other people, and the lands, wa-
                        lowing.                               ters, and wildlife with respect and courtesy.
                        United States Coast Guard             Whenever and wherever you are boating,
                        Consumer Affairs Staff (G-BC)         think of yourself as the guest of those around
                        Office of Boating, Public, and Consumer Af-  you. Remember, for example, that the sound
                        fairs                                 of your boat may be music to you, but it could
                        US Coast Guard Headquarters           be just noise to others. And the exciting
                        Washington, D.C. 20593-0001           splash of your wake can make waves others
                        http://www.uscgboating.org            won’t enjoy. Avoid riding close to shoreline
                        Other sources                         homes and waterfowl nesting areas or other
                        You can find local rules by contacting the Na-  wildlife areas, and keep a respectful distance
                        tional Association of State Boating Law Ad-  from fishermen, other boats, swimmers, and
                        ministrators, or your local Power Squadron.  populated beaches. When travel in areas like
                        Boat Education and Training           these  is unavoidable, operate slowly and
                        The Online Boating Safety Course, available  obey all laws.
                        through the watercraft section of  the  Remember that pollution can be harmful to
                        yamaha-motor.com  website, is a free, 50-  the environment. Do not refuel or add oil
                        question learning course available to the  where a spill could cause damage to nature.
                        public. Upon successful completion of 80  Keep your surroundings pleasant for the peo-
                        percent or better, the user can request a cer-  ple  and wildlife that share the  waterways:
                        tificate of completion by mail or can down-  don’t litter!
                        load one immediately. The  Online  Boating  When you go boating responsibly, with  re-
                        Safety Course, provided by  the Boat/US  spect and courtesy for others, you help en-
                        Foundation, is approved by the National As-  sure  that our waterways stay open  for  the
                        sociation of State Boating Law Administra-  enjoyment of a variety of recreational oppor-
                        tors (NASBLA) and recognized by the United  tunities.
                        States Coast Guard. This course meets the
                        education requirement for those states that
                        recognize  non-proctored,  NASBLA-ap-
                        proved courses.
                          The Online Boating Safety Course:
                          http://www.boatus.org/









                        28]]></page><page Index="41"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 29  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                Description

                                                     Boat glossary



                          TERM          DEFINITION
                          Bow           The front part of the boat.
                          Deck          The “floor” or upper structure which covers the hull.
                          Give-way      The vessel that must yield the right-of-way when two boats meet.
                          Gunwale       The meeting junction of the deck and hull; the upper edge around the
                                        boat. Pronounced “gunnel.”
                          Hatch         An opening in the deck that provides access below.
                          Helm          The steering console.
                          Hull          The basic part of the boat; the underside.
                          Lanyard       The cord or tether that connects the operator to the engine shut-off
                                        switch so the engines will stop if the operator accidentally leaves the
                                        helm.
                          PFD           A personal flotation device, also known as “life jacket.”
                          Planing       Traveling at a speed fast enough so the boat has leveled out and is
                                        skimming on top of the water. There is a wake.
                          Port          The left side of the boat.
                          Stand-on      The vessel with the right-of-way when two boats meet.
                          Starboard     The right side of the boat.
                          Stern         The back part of the boat.
                          Sub-planing   Traveling at a medium speed. The bow of the boat is out of the water,
                                        but you are still traveling through the water. There is a wake.
                          Transom       The vertical part of the stern.
                          Trolling      Traveling at idle speed, using little or no throttle. The boat is down in the
                                        water and it is not leaving a wake.
                          Wake          The visible track of disturbed water that the boat leaves behind as it
                                        moves in the water.














                                                                                               29]]></page><page Index="42"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 30  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Description

                                            Location of main components
                        Exterior components





                          1               2     3
                                                                                    4

                                                                                       2










                          5


                                                      2
                                             8
                                       7


                                  6




                                                                                             9
                                                                                          2
                                                                                   10
                                        12                                   11

                        1  Bow light (page 84, 111)           10 Bilge pump outlet (page 153)
                        2  Cleat                              11 Cooling water pilot outlet (page 167)
                        3  Windshield (page 129)              12 Reboarding grip
                        4  Fuel tank filler cap (page 147)
                        5  Bow eye
                        6  Swim platform (page 134)
                        7  Flushing hose connector (page 187)
                        8  Ski tow hook
                        9  Horn (page 166)


                        30]]></page><page Index="43"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 31  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                Description
















                          AR220/222S/222SE/222SD               SX220

                          1           2             3               4          5



























                        1  Wakeboard tower (page 138)
                        2  Bimini top (page 139)
                        3  Anchor light (page 130)
                        4  Anchor light (page 131)
                        5  Bimini top (page 143)










                                                                                               31]]></page><page Index="44"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 32  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Description

                        Seats & interior components


                               1      2                    3            4      5       6

















                              12     11                      9          8     7        6


                                                  AR220/SX220
















                                                            10

                        1  Front starboard seat (front) (page 119)  12 Front port seat (front) (page 119)
                        2  Front starboard seat (rear) (page 119, 123)
                        3  Driver’s seat (page 119)
                        4  Rear starboard seat (page 119, 124)
                        5  Starboard engine hood seat (page 119, 122)
                        6  Swim platform seat (except for AR220 /
                           SX220) (page 120)
                        7  Port engine hood seat (page 119, 122)
                        8  Rear port seat (page 119, 124)
                        9  Passenger’s seat (page 119, 120)
                        10 Passenger’s seat
                        11 Front port seat (rear) (page 119, 123)
                        32]]></page><page Index="45"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 33  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                Description



                                                                         3           4  5




                                          1


                                                                   6       7
                                           2



                                      8                                      11
                                                         9


                                                        10




                                                             12







                                                      13             14



                        1  Anchor storage compartment (page 122)  11 Rear underseat storage compartment (page
                        2  Front underseat storage compartment (page   124)
                           123)                               12 Stern storage compartment (page 128)
                        3  Wireless charger (AR220 / SX220) (page 137)  13 12 V DC outlet (page 135)
                        4  Ski locker (page 123)              14 Wet storage compartment (page 128)
                        5  Driver’s side console compartment (page 125)
                        6  Glove compartment (AR220 / SX220) (page
                           127)
                        7  Enclosed head compartment (page 124)
                        8  Wireless charger (except for AR220 / SX220)
                           (page 137)
                        9  Stowable table (page 126)
                        10 Glove compartment (except for AR220 /
                           SX220) (page 127)

                                                                                               33]]></page><page Index="46"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 34  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Description




                          Courtesy (Interior) light



                                                         *



                                                                            * *

                          Beverage holder













                          Speaker
                                                                                           * *





                                                                                           * *


                                                                       * = 222S/222SE/222SD




















                        34]]></page><page Index="47"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 35  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                Description

                        Stern components


                                                            1



                                                                   2





                              3        4                                        4          3

                                           5                                   5
                                                    6
                                                       7











                                8                            9               10         8


                        1  Underwater seat/table (except for AR220 /
                           SX220) (page 121)
                        2  Stern ladder (page 134)
                        3  Stern eye
                        4  Shift gate (page 46)
                        5  Jet thrust nozzle
                        6  Underwater light (except for AR220 / SX220)
                           (page 84, 111)
                        7  Articulating keel (page 48)
                        8  Intake grate
                        9  Hull drain plug (page 152)
                        10 Water temperature/water depth sensor










                                                                                               35]]></page><page Index="48"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 36  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Description

                        Helm components
                        AR220 / SX220


                                                      4
                                        2    3                                               6
                               1
                                                                                             7
                                                                      5
                                                                                             8

                                                                                             9


                                                                          10
                                                                                12

                                                                          11



                                                                                      13

                                                                                           14
                                                              18



                                                        15
                                                                                16


                                                         5
                           19
                                                                    17

                        1  Wireless charger (page 137)        11 Audio control keypad (page 54)
                        2  Aux input (page 83)                12 Remote control lever (page 45)
                        3  USB charger (page 136)             13 Engine shut-off switch (page 42)
                        4  GPS antenna                        14 Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) (page 42)
                        5  Switch circuit breaker (page 51)   15 “BLOWER” switch (page 51)
                        6  “HORN” switch (page 67)            16 No-wake mode/cruise assist switch (page 52)
                        7  “BILGE” switch (page 67)           17 Main switch (page 44)
                        8  “NAV/ANC” switch (page 51)         18 Steering wheel (page 48)
                        9  “CTSY LIGHTS” switch (page 51)     19 Tilt lever (page 49)
                        10 Multi-function display unit (page 67)


                        36]]></page><page Index="49"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 37  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                Description

                        222S





                                            2    3       4
                                     1
                                                               5

                                                                           6       7   8





                                                                                    9








                                     14
                                                                      12










                                                            10           11
                            13


                        1  Wireless charger (page 137)        12 Steering wheel (page 48)
                        2  Aux input (page 110)               13 Tilt lever (page 49)
                        3  USB charger (page 136)             14 Controller (page 94)
                        4  GPS antenna
                        5  Multi-function display unit (page 93)
                        6  Main switch (page 44)
                        7  “BILGE” switch (page 92)
                        8  “HORN” switch (page 92)
                        9  Remote control lever (page 45)
                        10 Engine shut-off switch (page 42)
                        11 Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) (page 42)


                                                                                               37]]></page><page Index="50"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 38  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Description

                        222SE / 222SD

                                                                          5      67     8
                                                4
                                  2    3
                           1


                                                                                 910 11













                                                                                     12


                              18




                                                                               13
                                                          16
                                                                               14

                           17
                                                                               15

                        1  Wireless charger (page 137)        12 Remote control lever (page 45)
                        2  Aux input (page 110)               13 Main switch (page 44)
                        3  USB charger (page 136)             14 Engine shut-off switch (page 42)
                        4  Multi-function display unit (page 93)  15 Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) (page 42)
                        5  “START/STOP” button (page 45)      16 Steering wheel (page 48)
                        6  “ACC”1 switch (page 92)            17 Tilt lever (page 49)
                        7  “BLOWER” switch (page 92)          18 Controller (page 94)
                        8  “HORN” switch (page 92)
                        9  “ACC”2 switch (page 92)
                        10 “NAV LIGHTS” switch (page 92)
                        11 “BILGE” switch (page 92)


                        38]]></page><page Index="51"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 39  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                Description

                        Engine components
                        1050 cc engine models


                                           1                                2










                             3

                                                         4
                                                                                            3



















                                                 5

                        1  Blower (page 162)
                        2  Oil tank filler cap/Dipstick (page 149)
                        3  Spark plug/Ignition coil
                        4  Air filter case
                        5  Fuse box (cover) (page 214)










                                                                                               39]]></page><page Index="52"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 40  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Description

                        Engine components
                        1800 cc engine models
                                        1












                                                         2



                                                        3


                                                        4






                                                    5
                                                               6    7











                        1  Blower (page 163)
                        2  Fuse box (cover) (page 217)
                        3  Engine oil filler cap (page 150)
                        4  Engine cover (page 195)
                        5  Spark plug/Ignition coil
                        6  Dipstick (page 150)
                        7  Air filter case






                        40]]></page><page Index="53"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 41  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                Description

                        Engine components
                        1900 cc engine models


                                                             1







                                                       2
                                                                       3
                          2

                          3

                                                                                             4
                          4













                                                                         6





                                                      5

                        1  Fuse box (cover) (page 217)
                        2  Blower (page 162)
                        3  Engine oil filler cap (page 150)
                        4  Engine cover (page 195)
                        5  Spark plug/Ignition coil
                        6  Dipstick (page 150)








                                                                                               41]]></page><page Index="54"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 42  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Control function operation

                             Boat control functions           AR220 / SX220 / 222S
                        Engine shut-off switch
                             WARNING
                         Always attach the engine shut-off cord                       1
                          (lanyard) to your PFD before starting the
                          engines. Failure to attach the cord could
                          result in a runaway boat if the operator is           2
                          ejected.
                         Do not attach the cord to clothing that           3
                          could tear loose. Do not route the cord
                          in such a way that it could become en-  1  Engine shut-off switch
                          tangled, preventing it from functioning.   2  Clip
                         Avoid accidentally pulling the cord dur-  3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                          ing normal operation. Once the engines
                                                              222SE / 222SD
                          have stopped, you have no steering con-
                          trol of the boat which could result in an
                          accident. Also, without  engine power,
                          the boat could slow rapidly from planing                       1
                          speed. This could cause people and ob-
                          jects in the boat to be thrown forward,
                          which could cause injury.                                      2
                        The clip  on the  end of  the engine  shut-off
                        cord (lanyard) must be attached to the engine                    3
                        shut-off switch  for the  engines to run. The
                        cord must be attached to a secure place on  1  Engine shut-off switch
                        the operator’s PFD. Should the operator fall  2  Clip
                        overboard or leave the helm, the cord will pull  3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                        out the clip, stopping the ignition to the both
                        engines. This will prevent the boat from run-  TIP:
                        ning away under power.                It is recommended that a spare engine shut-
                                                              off cord (lanyard) be stored in a storage com-
                                                              partment near the driver’s  seat to  allow a
                                                              passenger to restart the vessel if the operator
                                                              falls overboard.

                                                              Batteries and battery switches
                                                              The batteries are located in the engine com-
                                                              partment.
                                                              This boat uses two marine batteries. One bat-
                                                              tery is designated as the start battery. The


                        42]]></page><page Index="55"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 43  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                         Control function operation

                        start battery is connected to the starter cir-
                        cuits on both engines to provide current for   1           2
                        the starter motors.
                        The other battery is designated as the house
                        battery. The house battery provides power
                        for the various accessory circuits on the boat,
                        such as the circuits for lighting, bilge pump,
                        blowers and audio system.
                                                 2
                            1
                                                              1  ON position (green)
                                                              2  OFF position (red)

                                                              In normal operation, keep the “START” and
                                                              “HOUSE” switches in the ON position. Keep
                                                              the “EMERG PARALLEL” switch in the OFF
                                                              position. This setting allows both batteries to
                                                              be charged automatically while the engines
                                                              are running.  NOTICE: Do  not turn the
                        1  Start battery
                        2  House battery                      “HOUSE” switch to the OFF position if the
                                                              boat is moored in the water as it will pre-
                        The battery switch assembly is located in the  vent the anchor light from functioning.
                        rear underseat storage compartment (port).  If  the start  battery is discharged, turn  the
                        There are three switches  on  the  battery  “EMERG PARALLEL” switch to the ON posi-
                        switch assembly: the  “START”  switch,  tion to start the engines. Once the engines
                        “HOUSE” switch, and “EMERG PARALLEL”  are started  or the start battery is charged,
                        switch.                               turn the “EMERG PARALLEL” switch to the
                                                              OFF position.

                         2                3


                                          4




                                                   1

                        1  Battery switch assembly
                        2  “HOUSE” switch (red)
                        3  “EMERG PARALLEL” switch (yellow)
                        4  “START” switch (red)


                                                                                               43]]></page><page Index="56"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 44  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Control function operation

                        Main switches                         START:
                        (AR220 / SX220 / 222S)                The starter motor will turn to start the engine.
                        There is a main switch for each engine.  (When the main switch key is released, it re-
                        The main  switch controls  the ignition  and  turns automatically to “ON”.)
                        electrical circuits as follows:       TIP:
                        AR220 / SX220                          The engine will not start when the clip is re-
                                                               moved from the engine  shut-off switch.
                                OFF     START                  The starter motor will turn over without the
                                     ON                        cord attached.
                                                               The main switch will not operate (the starter
                                                               motor will not turn over) if the “START”
                                                               switch is turned to the OFF position. (See
                                                               page 42 for more information.)

                              1                      2        Main switch (222SE / 222SD)
                                                              The main switch controls the ignition circuit
                        1  Main switch (port engine)          as follows:
                        2  Main switch (starboard engine)
                                                                              ON
                        222S                                          OFF

                         OFF     START
                              ON
                                                                                         1






                                                              1  Main switch
                          1                 2
                                                              OFF:
                        1  Main switch (port engine)
                                                              Ignition circuit is  switched off.  The engines
                        2  Main switch (starboard engine)
                                                              cannot be started. (The main switch key can
                        OFF:                                  be removed.)
                        Ignition circuit is switched off.  The engine  ON:
                        cannot be started, but other switches will op-  Ignition  circuit is  switched on. (The main
                        erate. (The main switch key can be removed.)  switch key cannot be removed.)
                        ON:
                        Ignition circuit is switched on. (The main
                        switch key cannot be removed.)





                        44]]></page><page Index="57"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 45  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                         Control function operation

                        “START/STOP” buttons                   swamping, or damage to the boat could
                        (222SE / 222SD)                        occur.
                        The engines can  be  started or stopped by
                                                              The remote control lever for each engine con-
                        pushing the “START/STOP” buttons. It is
                                                              trols both throttle and shifting. In normal op-
                        possible to start or stop the engines individu-
                                                              eration, the levers are moved together.
                        ally.
                                                              Moving the remote control levers  forward
                         PORT: Port engine
                                                              from the neutral position shifts into the for-
                         STBD: Starboard engine
                                                              ward position,  and then as the  levers are
                                                              moved farther, accelerates  the  engines for
                                                              more thrust. Moving the levers back from the
                                                              neutral position shifts into the reverse posi-
                                                              tion, and then as the levers are moved farther,
                                                              accelerates the engines for more thrust.
                                                              AR220 / SX220 / 222S: For cruising, adjust
                                                              the remote control levers so both engines are
                                                              running at the same engine speed.
                                         1                    TIP:
                                                              Because of the mechanical throttle linkage,
                        1  “START/STOP” button
                                                              the remote control levers may not be exactly
                                                              even with one another when the engines are
                        TIP:
                                                              running at the same engine speed.
                         The engine will not start when the clip is re-
                          moved from the engine shut-off switch.
                         The main switch will not operate (the starter       N
                          motor  will not turn over) if the “START”  F  2  5   1    5    R
                          switch is turned to the OFF position. (See  3                 4
                          page 42 for more information.)
                                                                  7                         7
                                                                            6     6
                        Remote control levers
                                                               8                              8
                             WARNING
                         Before shifting, make sure there are no
                          swimmers  or obstacles in the water
                          near you.                           1  Neutral position
                         When operating in reverse, go slowly.  2  TDE position
                          Do not open the throttle more than half.  3  Forward position
                                                              4  Reverse position
                          Otherwise, the boat may become unsta-
                                                              5  Shift
                          ble, which could result in loss of control
                                                              6  Fully closed
                          and an accident.
                                                              7  Throttle
                         Do not shift into reverse while traveling
                                                              8  Fully open
                          at planing speeds. Loss of control, boat
                                                                                               45]]></page><page Index="58"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 46  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Control function operation


                        TIP:                                  turned, even though there is less thrust avail-
                        This boat is equipped with a “start-in-gear”  able at low engine speeds.
                        protection. The engines will not start unless         N
                        the levers are in the neutral position.
                                                                    F   1                R
                        This boat uses a direct-drive propulsion sys-
                        tem. Therefore, jet thrust is always being pro-
                        duced while the engines are running. The
                        direction of the boat is controlled by the shift
                        gates, which direct the flow of the jet thrust as
                        follows:


                        Neutral                               1  TDE position
                        The shift gates are dropped down part way
                        over the jet thrust nozzles. The neutral posi-
                        tion balances forward and reverse thrust to
                        help keep the  boat  from moving, although  1
                        some movement may occur.

                                                                2
                          1


                          2
                                                              1  Shift gate
                                                              2  Jet thrust nozzle
                                                              When the remote control levers are moved
                        1  Shift gate                         farther forward, the shift gates are lifted all the
                        2  Jet thrust nozzle                  way up.  All  jet thrust is  to the rear, which
                                                              moves the boat forward.
                        Forward
                        When the remote control levers are initially
                        moved to the forward position and the boat is
                        operating at a slow speed, the shift gates are
                        lifted up slightly from the neutral position and
                        jet thrust is directed downward at an angle.
                        This function, which is called the thrust direc-
                        tional enhancer (TDE), helps to provide good
                        handling response when the steering wheel is




                        46]]></page><page Index="59"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 47  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                         Control function operation

                                                               turn to the neutral position and the engines
                          1                                    will return to idle speed.



                                                                                   1
                          2                                       2






                        1  Shift gate
                        2  Jet thrust nozzle
                                                              1  Throttle/shift paddle (right)
                        Throttle/shift paddles (222SD)        2  Throttle/shift paddle (left)
                        When the DRiVE mode is activated, the throt-
                        tle/shift paddles can be used at low speeds  TIP:
                        to control the throttle and shifting instead of   If the operator pulls both throttle/shift pad-
                        the remote control levers. When making  dles until they stop, the reverse operation
                        small throttle  adjustments for  docking, the  has priority.
                        operator can use the throttle/shift paddles to   When the DRiVE mode is activated, the en-
                        operate the boat smoothly forward and in re-  gine speed for forward operation is limited
                        verse while keeping both hands on the steer-  to approximately 3000 rpm and the engine
                        ing wheel. (See page 101 for information on  speed for reverse operation is limited to ap-
                        the DRiVE mode.)                       proximately 3500 rpm.
                         When the operator  pulls  the throttle/shift   If either throttle/shift paddle is pulled while
                          paddle (right), the shift gates for both en-  starting the  engines, the  engines will not
                          gines will move to the TDE position, the en-  start.
                          gine speed will increase, and the boat will
                          move forward at a slow speed. When the  Reverse
                          operator releases the throttle/shift paddle  The shift gates are dropped all the way down
                          (right), the shift gates will return to the neu-  over the jet thrust nozzles. Jet thrust is redi-
                          tral position and the engines will return to  rected  toward  the bow of the  boat, which
                          idle speed.                         moves the boat backward.
                         When the operator  pulls  the throttle/shift
                          paddle  (left), the shift  gates for  both en-
                          gines will move to the reverse position, the
                          engine speed will increase, and the boat
                          will start moving in reverse at a slow speed.
                          When the operator releases  the throt-
                          tle/shift paddle (left), the shift gates will re-




                                                                                               47]]></page><page Index="60"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 48  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Control function operation


                                                                                 1

                          1
                                                                     1          2
                                                                            2







                        1  Shift gate                         1  Running mode and single lever mode
                                                              2  DRiVE mode (222SD)
                        Steering
                        Your boat can be steered by turning the
                        steering wheel the same direction you wish to
                        travel, to the right or left. When the steering
                        wheel is turned, the angle  of the jet thrust
                        nozzles at the rear of the craft is changed,
                        and the change in direction of the jet thrust
                        nozzles changes the direction of the boat ac-
                        cordingly. In addition, the direction of the ar-                 1
                        ticulating keel changes according to the   1                2
                        movement of the jet thrust nozzles.
                        222SD: When the operator is using the throt-  1  Jet thrust nozzle
                        tle/shift paddles (DRiVE  mode), the  turning  2  Articulating keel
                        range of the steering wheel is approximately
                        half the range of when the operator is using  Since the strength of the jet thrust determines
                        the remote control levers (running mode or  the speed and direction of a turn, the throttle
                        single lever mode).  Although the turning  must always be opened above idle when at-
                        range of the steering wheel changes depend-  tempting a turn, except at trolling speed.
                        ing on the operation mode, the movement of  Because boats steer from the stern, the stern
                        the jet thrust nozzles is adjusted automatical-  of the boat swings out in the opposite direc-
                        ly so that the full range of motion for the noz-  tion of your turn. If you turn to starboard, for
                        zles matches the turning range regardless of  example, the stern of the boat will swing to
                        the selected mode. (See page 101 for infor-  the left. Keep this in mind when navigating
                        mation on each operation mode.)       near a person in the water, such as a down
                                                              wakeboarder or water-skier, or an obstacle,
                                                              such as a dock.







                        48]]></page><page Index="61"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 49  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                         Control function operation

                        Tilt lever
                             WARNING

                         Never touch the tilt lever during opera-
                          tion, otherwise the steering wheel could
                          suddenly change  position, which may
                          lead to an accident.
                         Be sure the steering wheel is locked in
                          position after adjustment. If the steering
                          wheel is not locked in position, it may
                          suddenly change position during opera-
                          tion, which may lead to an accident.
                        The tilt lever is located  under the steering
                        wheel and is used to adjust the tilt of the
                        steering wheel. There are 5 positions.













                                                1
                        1  Tilt lever

                        To adjust the tilt:
                        (1) Push the lever down, and then move the
                            steering wheel up or down to the desired
                            position.
                        (2) The lever will lock into place when the
                            steering wheel is moved into one of the 5
                            available positions.
                        (3) Make sure that the tilt lever returns to its
                            original  position and that  the steering
                            wheel is securely locked in place.








                                                                                               49]]></page><page Index="62"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 50  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                           Helm controls (AR220 / SX220)






                                                                                             5
                                        2    3
                               1
                                                                                             6
                                                                      4
                                                                                             7
                                                                                             8



                                                                          9
                                                                          10




                                                                      11                    12


                                                                      4




                        1  Wireless charger
                        2  Aux input
                        3  USB charger
                        4  Switch circuit breaker
                        5  “HORN” switch
                        6  “BILGE” switch
                        7  “NAV/ANC” switch
                        8  “CTSY LIGHTS” switch
                        9  Multi-function display unit
                        10 Stereo receiver
                        11 “BLOWER” switch
                        12 No-wake mode/cruise assist switch










                        50]]></page><page Index="63"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 51  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Switches                              “BLOWER” switch
                                                              Push the blower switch to turn on the blowers
                                                              to  ventilate  the engine compartment. (See
                                                  1           page 162 for more information.)
                                                   2          “CTSY LIGHTS” switch
                                                              Push this switch to turn on the courtesy light
                                                   3          inside the boat.

                                                   4
                                                              “NAV/ANC” switch
                                                              This toggle switch controls the bow light and
                                                              anchor light. Push the left side of the switch
                        1  “HORN” switch
                                                              to turn on both the bow light and anchor light
                        2  “BILGE” switch
                                                              for night running (“NAV”). Push the right side
                        3  “NAV/ANC” switch
                                                              of the switch to operate the anchor light alone
                        4  “CTSY LIGHTS” switch
                                                              when anchored  at night (“ANC”). Put the
                                                              switch in the middle position to turn off all
                                                              lights. (See pages 130 and 131 for more infor-
                                                              mation on the anchor light.)
                            1
                                                      2
                                                              Switch circuit breakers
                                                              The electrical circuit for each switch is pro-
                                                              tected by a circuit breaker. If the button pops
                                                              out, push it back in with your finger. If it pops
                                                              out again, ask a Yamaha Boat Dealer to in-
                                                              spect the electrical system.

                        1  “BLOWER” switch
                        2  No-wake mode/cruise assist switch

                        “HORN” switch
                        Push  this switch  to activate  the horn. The
                        horn can be used to signal other boats as re-  1
                        quired by the “Rules of the road”. (See page
                        22 for more information.)


                        “BILGE” switch
                        Push the bilge pump switch to activate the
                                                              1  Switch circuit breaker
                        bilge pump. (See page 153 for more informa-
                        tion.)






                                                                                               51]]></page><page Index="64"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 52  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                                              To activate the cruise assist:
                                                              (1) Push the remote control levers forward
                                                                 to open the throttle until the desired en-
                                                                 gine speed is reached.
                                                              (2) Push the plus side or minus side of the
                                                                 no-wake mode/cruise assist switch.
                                                              Once “CRUISE ASSIST” and the cruise assist
                               1                              setting level are displayed in the multifunction
                                                              display, the cruise assist is activated.

                                                                       SE      S      SW
                        1  Switch circuit breaker

                        No-wake mode / cruise assist switch
                        This switch activates and sets the no-wake
                        mode, cruise assist, and reverse RPM con-
                        trol.                                                 MPH
                                                                          CRUISE ASSIST:
                                                                                    1
                                                   1          1  Cruise assist setting level

                                                              TIP:
                                                               Once the cruise assist is activated, the set
                                                               engine speed can be increased by pushing
                                                               the plus side of the switch or decreased by
                                                               pushing the minus side. However, the ad-
                        1  No-wake mode / cruise assist switch  justment is limited to a maximum of 8 incre-
                                                               ments above or below the initial cruise
                        To operate the no-wake mode and cruise as-  assist  setting. Each time the  switch is
                        sist, see the following sections. To activate  pushed, the engine speed will increase or
                        the reverse RPM control, see “Reverse RPM  decrease approximately 100–200 rpm.
                        control” on page 53.                   While the cruise assist is activated, the en-
                                                               gine speed can also be adjusted by operat-
                        Operating the boat at a steady speed   ing the remote control levers.
                        (cruise assist)
                        The cruise assist feature is for steady engine  To deactivate the cruise assist:
                        speed operation when the boat is traveling  Operate the remote control  levers  to  de-
                        above no-wake speeds. The cruise assist is  crease the engine speed to 3000 rpm or less.
                        available for use whenever the engine is run-  Once “CRUISE ASSIST” and the cruise assist
                        ning above 3000 rpm and below 7000 rpm.  setting level disappear, the  cruise assist is
                                                              deactivated.


                        52]]></page><page Index="65"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 53  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Operating the boat with a minimal      Push the minus side of the no-wake mode /
                        wake (no-wake mode)                    cruise assist switch until “No Wake” and
                        The no-wake mode is useful for operating the  the no-wake mode setting level disap-
                        boat at a steady speed with a minimal wake.  pears.
                        This is especially convenient when traveling   Push the remote control levers forward to
                        in harbors, channels, or other areas posted  open the throttle.
                        with low speed limits as “no wake zones”.
                                                              Operating the boat in reverse with
                        The no-wake mode can be used only when  more thrust (reverse RPM control)
                        the engine is operating at idle speed.  Engine speed in reverse is limited to approx-
                        To activate the no-wake mode:         imately 4500 rpm. If more thrust is required
                        (1) Put the remote control levers in the TDE  when the boat is traveling in reverse, use the
                            position or forward position so that the  reverse RPM control.  WARNING! Be  pre-
                            engine is operating at idle speed.  pared to  reduce throttle as  soon as the
                        (2) Push the plus side  of the no-wake  boat moves as desired.  Otherwise, the
                            mode /  cruise assist switch. Once “No  boat may become unstable, which could
                            Wake” and the no-wake mode setting  result in loss of control and an accident.
                            level is displayed in the multifunction me-  To activate the reverse RPM control:
                            ter, the no-wake mode is activated.  (1) Move the remote control levers  back-
                                                                 ward so that the throttle is opened in re-
                                  SE      S      SW
                                                                 verse.
                                                              (2) Increase the engine speed to 4500 rpm,
                                                                 and then push the plus side of the no-
                                                                 wake mode / cruise assist switch.
                                                              TIP:
                                         MPH                  Once the reverse RPM control is activated,
                                      No Wake:                pushing the plus side of the no-wake mode /
                                                              cruise assist switch will increase the available
                                            1                 engine speed by approximately 500 rpm in 3
                        1  No-wake mode setting level         stages up to a maximum of 6000 rpm, and
                                                              pushing the minus side will decrease  the
                        TIP:                                  available engine speed. However, the adjust-
                        The no-wake mode can be set to 3 engine  ment is limited to these 3 increments.
                        speeds. To adjust the engine speed while the  To deactivate the reverse RPM control:
                        no-wake mode is activated, push the plus  Operate the remote control  levers  to  de-
                        side or minus side of the no-wake mode /  crease the engine speed to less than 4500
                        cruise assist switch.                 rpm.

                        To deactivate the no-wake mode:
                        Perform one of the following operations.




                                                                                               53]]></page><page Index="66"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 54  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                  Stereo system
                        The stereo system consists of the receiver,
                        speakers, auxiliary input jack, and Bluetooth.
                        Refer to the stereo system Operation Manual
                        included with your boat.

                               1



                                                        2







                        1  Auxiliary input jack
                        2  Stereo receiver

                        Multi-function display unit operation
                        Because the multi-function display unit is
                        equipped with a touch screen, you can touch
                        the display directly to operate  the display
                        functions.

                        Touching the multi-function display




                                   NW   N    NE
                            FUEL                   DEPTH
                            50  %     FLOAT MODE   0  Ft
                                           °F
                                      Water Temp
                             START               HOUSE
                             12.1  V             12.0 V













                        54]]></page><page Index="67"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 55  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                           Multi-function display elements

                                              1             2             1



                                                     NW      N      NE
                                         FUEL                                 DEPTH
                                        50  %           FLOAT MODE            0  Ft

                                                                 °F
                                                         Water Temp


                                           START                            HOUSE
                                           12.1  V                          12.0  V
                                                           4    3
                        1  Static bar                         3  Center display
                        2  Screen tab bar                     4  Warning icon bar

                        Static bar


                                                        NW       NE
                                        FUEL                                  DEPTH
                                 1                                                     4
                                        50  %                                 0  Ft
                                                                                       5
                                 2                                                     6






                                 3                                                     7
                                           START
                                                                           HOUSE
                                           12.1  V                         12.0  V
                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Fuel level bar graph  Displays the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. Depending
                                                 on the amount of remaining fuel, the bar graph is displayed in 3
                                                 colors: blue, yellow, and red.
                          2  Port engine tachometer  Displays the engine speed.
                          3  Start battery voltage   Displays the Start battery voltage in a numerical format.
                             value
                          4  Depth level         Displays the water depth in feet or meters. Depending on the wa-
                                                 ter depth, the bar graph is displayed in 3 colors: blue, yellow, and
                                                 red.
                                                                                               55]]></page><page Index="68"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 56  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation


                                    Name                             Function
                          5  Day/Night brightness  Switches between day brightness and night brightness. (See page
                                                 60.)
                          6  Engine tachometer   Displays the engine speed.
                          7  House battery voltage   Displays the house battery voltage in a numerical format.
                             value


                        Center display

                                                  NW         N        NE

                                                       FLOAT MODE


                                                                   °F

                                                        Water Temp
                                                                            1



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Center display      Displays various information for each screen tab.

                        Screen tab bar

                                      1         2           3            4         5








                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Clock               Displays the time. Tap the clock to set the time. (See page 60.)
                          2  Home screen tab     Displays the home screen. (See page 58.)
                          3  Trip screen tab     Displays the trip screen. (See page 58.)
                          4  Setting screen tab  Displays the setting screen. (See page 59.)
                          5  Warning mute button  Mutes the sound of the buzzer for a specific time depending on
                                                 the warnings present.







                        56]]></page><page Index="69"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 57  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Warning icon bar

                                                            1




                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Warning icon bar    Displays the warning icons.
                                                 When a warning icon is displayed, tap the icon to display the
                                                 warning message for that icon.


















































                                                                                               57]]></page><page Index="70"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 58  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                  Home screen                            Trip screen
                        This screen displays the boat speed, current  This screen displays the hours of engine op-
                        heading of the boat, and other information.  eration, fuel consumption, and other informa-
                                                              tion.
                         1        NW      N       NE                          1            2 3
                                                                      NW       N        NE
                                    RUNNING MODE
                                                                     Economy :    0.0 MPG
                         2                                          Trip Distance:  0.0 Mi
                                        MPH                          Fuel Used :  0.0 Gal
                         3                                           Fuel Flow :  0.0 GPH

                                                                                          Reset All
                                Name           Function
                         1  Heading       Displays the heading   1  Menu
                                          of the boat.        2  Scrollbar
                         2  Boat speed*   Displays the boat   3  “Reset All” button
                                          speed in miles per
                                          hour or kilometers per   The menu displays the following items. Scroll
                                          hour.
                                                              through the menu items using the scrollbar.
                         3  Cruise  as-   Displays the operating
                            sist/no-wake   status of the cruise as-  Name          Function
                            mode status in-  sist and no-wake   Economy     Shows the average dis-
                            dicator       mode.                             tance that can be traveled
                                          When the cruise assist            on 1.0 gallon or 1.0 liter of
                                          is activated, “CRUISE             fuel. When gallons are se-
                                          ASSIST” and the                   lected for the display units,
                                          cruise assist setting             the value is shown in miles
                                          level will be displayed.          and when liters are selected
                                          When the no-wake                  for the display units, the
                                          mode is activated, “No            value is shown in kilome-
                                          Wake” and the no-                 ters.
                                          wake mode setting lev-  Trip Distance  Shows the distance trav-
                                          el will be displayed.
                                                                            eled by the boat in miles or
                                                                            kilometers since the item
                        * When both engines are not running, the wa-        was last reset.
                          ter temperature will be displayed.  Fuel Used     Shows the total fuel that
                                                                            has been consumed by the
                                                                            port and starboard engines
                                                                            in gallons or liters.
                                                              Fuel Flow*    Shows the total fuel con-
                                                                            sumption of the port and
                                                                            starboard engines in gal-
                                                                            lons per hour or liters per
                                                                            hour.




                        58]]></page><page Index="71"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 59  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                             Name            Function                  Setting screen
                         Water Temp*   Shows the ambient water   The setting screen can be used to change the
                                       temperature in degrees   settings of the multi-function display unit.
                                       Fahrenheit or degrees Cel-
                                       sius.
                         Average Speed*  Shows the average boat               Menu
                                       speed in miles per hour or
                                       kilometers per hour.
                                                                       Time         Depth
                         Highest Speed*  Shows the highest speed of
                                       the boat in miles per hour or   Unit        Brightness
                                       kilometers per hour.
                                                                      Wellness     Language
                         Port Engine   Shows the total number of
                         Hours*        hours that the port engine   Satellite Status
                                       has been running since the
                                       boat was new.                                       Reset
                         Stbd Engine   Shows the total number of
                         Hours*        hours that the starboard en-  Item          Function
                                       gine has been running since
                                       the boat was new.                     Displays the time setting
                                                                   Time      screen.
                        * This item cannot be reset.
                                                                             Displays the depth alarm
                        To reset an item on the trip screen:       Depth     setting screen.
                        Touch and hold the “  ” of the item that
                        you want to reset for several seconds.               Displays the unit setting
                                                                    Unit     screen.
                        To reset all of the display items:
                                                                             Displays the brightness
                        Touch the “Reset All” button to reset all of the
                                                                  Brightness  setting screen.
                        items.
                                                                             Displays the maintenance
                                                                  Wellness   setting screen.

                                                                             Displays the language set-
                                                                  Language   ting screen.

                                                                             Displays the satellite status
                                                                 Satellite Status  screen.

                                                                             Displays the factory reset
                                                                   Reset     screen.











                                                                                               59]]></page><page Index="72"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 60  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Time setting screen                    If the water depth is set to 0.0 m (0.0 ft), the
                        Perform settings related to the time.  depth alarm will not operate.

                                         Time                 (2) Tap “Back” to complete the setting.
                                12-Hour:   24-Hour:
                                                              Unit setting screen
                                                              The display units for the multi-function dis-
                               GMT Offset:    -4
                                                              play unit can be changed.
                             Daylight Saving Time:  Disabled
                                                                             Set Unit
                            Back
                                                                             U.S. Std
                        To set the time:
                        (1) Select a 12 hour display or 24 hour dis-  U.S. Std       Metric
                            play.
                        (2) Tap “   ” or “  ” to adjust GMT off-
                            set.                                 Back
                        (3) Select to enable or disable daylight sav-
                            ing time.
                                                              Select “U.S. Std” or “Metric”.
                        Depth alarm setting screen
                        The water depth for the depth alarm can be  Brightness setting screen
                        set.                                  The multi-function display has a day mode
                                                              and a night mode.
                                     Set Depth Alarm          The brightness can be set separately for the
                                                              day mode and for the night mode.

                                        5.0 Ft
                                                                           Set Brightness

                                                                       Night:    30  Day:    90
                            Back
                                         1
                        1  Slider control
                                                                 Back
                        To adjust the water depth setting:
                        (1) Move the slider control left or right.
                        TIP:                                  To set the brightness:
                         The water depth can also be adjusted by  (1) Set either “Night” or “Day”.
                          tapping the “  ” or “  ” button.    (2) Move the slider control left or right to ad-
                                                                 just.


                        60]]></page><page Index="73"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 61  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                                              Language setting screen
                                         1                    The language for the  multi-function  display
                                                              unit can be changed.


                        1  Slider control                                  Set Language

                        TIP:
                                                                       English     Espanol
                        The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-
                        ping the “    ” or “   ” button.                     Francais

                        (3) Tap “Back”.
                                                                 Back
                        Maintenance setting screen
                        This screen displays the number of hours that  To change the language, tap the desired lan-
                        the engines have been running since the last  guage.
                        maintenance.
                                                              Satellite status
                                                              Display detectable satellites.
                                 Time Since Last Maintenance
                             Port Engine          0  Hrs
                                                                           Satellite Status
                                                                        Satellites:  7
                              Starboard Engine    0  Hrs
                                                                        Time (+0):  6:52
                                                                         Latitude:  34.6893
                            Back                     Reset
                                                                        Longitude:  137.5789
                        After maintenance is  performed, reset the  Back
                        number of hours of operation as follows.

                        To reset the number of hours of operation:  Factory reset screen
                        (1) Tap the “Reset” button.           This screen can be set to the factory settings.
                        (2) When the confirmation message ap-
                            pears, tap the “YES” button to reset the
                            number of hours of operation.            Are you sure you would like to reset to
                                                                           factory settings?
                        TIP:                                            You cannot undo this action!
                        To return to the maintenance setting screen
                        without  resetting the number of hours, tap
                        the “NO” button.
                                                                 Cancel                   Conﬁrm



                                                                                               61]]></page><page Index="74"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 62  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        To reset to the factory setting:
                        (1) Tap “Confirm”.
                        (2) When the confirmation message ap-
                            pears, tap the “YES” button.


























































                        62]]></page><page Index="75"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 63  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                                       Warnings
                        If a malfunction or fault occurs, a warning buzzer will sound and a warning icon and warning
                        message will be displayed on the center display.
                        If the displayed warning message includes instructions, follow those instructions. If you have
                        any questions, consult a Yamaha Boat dealer.



                                                    NW
                                                    NW       N N     NE
                                                                     NE
                                      F FUEL
                                      F FUEL                                    DEPTH
                                                                                DEPTHTHH
                                                         O
                                                        FL
                                                           AT M
                                                              O
                                                          Check Engine !
                                  1   50 50 50 5  % % %  FLOAT MODEDE            0 0 0  Ft F F Ft t t
                                  2                Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                                                                  °F °F
                                                                        OK
                                                         ater
                                                             em
                                                        W
                                                            T
                                                        Water Tempp
                                        S
                                        STARTTART                             HOUSE
                                                                              H
                                                                              OUSE
                                          .1
                                         2
                                        1 12.1  V V                          12.00  V V
                                                                             12.
                        1  Warning title
                        2  Message
                        Warning example
                                      Warning title                        Message
                         Check Engine                        Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Low Oil Pressure                    Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Check Battery                       Low Voltage detected.
                                                             Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         GPS Communication Failure           Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Transducer Communication Failure    Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Engine Over Temperature             Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Low Fuel                            Fuel level is low. Please refuel soon.
                         Low Fuel Warning                    Fuel level is less than 10%.
                         Depth Warning                       Depth alarm limit reached.










                                                                                               63]]></page><page Index="76"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 64  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Check engine warning                  Check that water comes out of the outlets
                        If an engine sensor malfunction or a short cir-  while the engines are running, particularly
                        cuit is detected, a warning will appear on the  while applying throttle. If you do not see any
                        multi-function display and the buzzer will  water at the outlets, cooling water may not be
                        sound. If a fault is detected for the engine,  circulating in the engines.
                        “Check Engine” will be displayed. If this oc-
                        curs, reduce the  engine speed,  return to
                        shore, and have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check
                        the engine.

                        Low oil pressure warning
                        If the oil pressure does not rise to specifica-
                        tion, a warning will appear on the multi-func-
                        tion display and the buzzer will sound. If a    2
                        fault is detected  for the engine, “Low Oil  1
                        Pressure” will be displayed. At the same time,  1  Cooling water pilot outlet (starboard engine)
                        the engine speed is automatically limited to  2  Cooling water pilot outlet (port engine)
                        help prevent damage. If this occurs, reduce
                        the engine speed, return to shore or maneu-  TIP:
                        ver to a safe location, and check the engine  If the cooling water passages in the engine
                        oil level. (See page 149 for engine oil level  are dry, it will take about 20 seconds for wa-
                        checking procedures.)                 ter to reach the pilot outlets after starting.
                        If the oil level is low, add enough engine oil to
                        raise it to the proper level. If the oil level is suf-  If water is not circulating, something may be
                        ficient, have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the  clogging the intake grate. Refer to “Jet pump
                        engine.                               clean-out procedure” on page 209.

                        Over temperature warning
                        This model is equipped with an over temper-
                        ature warning system. If the engines start to
                        overheat, a warning will appear on the multi-
                        function display and the buzzer will sound. If
                        an engine is overheating, “Engine Over Tem-
                        perature” will be displayed. At the same time,
                                                                        1
                        the engine speed is automatically limited to
                        help prevent damage. If this occurs, immedi-
                        ately reduce the engine speed,  return to
                                                              1  Intake grate
                        shore  or maneuver to a safe location,  and
                        check for water discharge at the cooling wa-
                        ter pilot outlets. There are cooling water pilot
                        outlets on the  starboard  side of the  hull.



                        64]]></page><page Index="77"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 65  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                         NOTICE                               Low fuel level warning
                                                              If “Low Fuel” appears on the multi-function
                        If the  cause of overheating  cannot be  display and the buzzer will sound, refill the
                        found and corrected, take special precau-  fuel tank as soon as possible. (See page 147
                        tions to avoid major engine damage while  for information on filling the fuel tank.)
                        you return to shore.
                        Single engine overheating — Shut off the  Depth warning
                        overheating engine and use the properly  If the boat enters an area that is shallower
                        running engine to return to shore. Operate  than the water depth set for the depth alarm,
                        at no-wake speed (8 km/h, 5 mph) to pre-  the depth warning will be activated and the
                        vent water from flooding the non-operat-  buzzer will sound.
                        ing engine through the water intake. See  If the warning is activated, move the boat to
                        page 53 for  information on the no-wake  an area that is deeper than the water depth
                        mode.                                 set for the depth alarm. (See page 60 for in-
                        Both  engines overheating — If getting a  formation on setting the depth alarm.)
                        tow from another vessel is not possible,
                        operate both engines just slightly above
                        idle while you return to shore. If you can be
                        towed, refer to “Towing the boat” on page
                        220.

                        Battery voltage warning
                        If “Check Battery” appears on the multi-func-
                        tion display and the buzzer will sound, check
                        the battery connections. If the battery con-
                        nections are clean and tight and the warning
                        indication  continues, have  a Yamaha Boat
                        Dealer check the charging system.

                        Communication error warning
                        If a communication error is detected for the
                        GPS function, a sensor, or other device, a
                        warning will appear on the multi-function dis-
                        play and the buzzer will sound. If this occurs,
                        reduce the engine speed, return to shore, and
                        have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the boat.










                                                                                               65]]></page><page Index="78"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 66  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                                 Helm controls (222S)




                                       2    3
                               1
                                                         4



                                                                                   5   6














                                  7




                        1  Wireless charger
                        2  Aux input
                        3  USB charger
                        4  Multi-function display unit
                        5  “BILGE” switch
                        6  “HORN” switch
                        7  Controller



















                        66]]></page><page Index="79"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 67  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Switch panel                             Multi-function display unit
                        In addition to touching the multi-function dis-   operation
                        play directly, you can use the switches to op-
                                                              Because the multi-function display unit is
                        erate various functions.
                                                              equipped with a touch screen, you can touch
                                                              the display directly to operate the display
                                                              functions.
                                             1     2          In addition to touching the display, you can
                                                              use the joystick to operate the display func-
                                                              tions.

                                                              Touching the multi-function display




                        1  “BILGE” switch                                NW   N   NE
                                                                 FUEL                   DEPTH
                        2  “HORN” switch                         50  %     FLOAT MODE   0  Ft
                                                                                °F
                        “HORN” switch                                      Water Temp
                        Activates the horn. The horn can be used to  START  V          HOUSE  V
                                                                                       11.8
                                                                   11.8
                        signal other boats as required by the “Rules  Bilge  Blower  Nav  Anchor
                        of the road”. (See page 22.)
                        The switch light comes on while the horn is
                        operating.
                                                              Using the joystick
                        “BILGE” switch                        This joystick has the following two operation
                        Turns the bilge pump on or off. (See page  modes.
                        153.)                                  Volume control mode
                        The switch light comes on while the bilge   Navigation control mode
                        pump is operating.                    Push the  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button to
                        TIP:                                  switch the operation mode.
                        Even if the bilge pump is turned off, the pump
                                                                               1
                        will operate every 2 minutes when the house
                        battery switch is in the on position.
                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL



                                                                            CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                            NO WAKE  NO WAKE


                                                              1  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button


                                                                                               67]]></page><page Index="80"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 68  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Volume control mode
                        Turn the joystick knob to change the audio
                        volume.
                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL
                                                                            CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                            NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                 1
                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                              TIP:
                                                              Although the procedures in this manual ex-
                        1  Joystick knob                      plain how to make selections by touching the
                                                              display, you can also make selections using
                        Navigation control mode               the joystick knob.
                        (1) Turn the joystick knob to change the se-
                            lected setting or item.



                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL
                                                 1


                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE

                        1  Joystick knob
                        (2) Push the joystick knob to select an item
                            or confirm a setting.
















                        68]]></page><page Index="81"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 69  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                Operation buttons             Operating the boat at a steady speed
                        In addition to touching the multi-function dis-  (cruise assist)
                        play directly, you can use the operation but-  The cruise assist feature is for steady engine
                        tons and the controller to operate  various  speed operation when the boat is traveling
                        functions.                            above no-wake speeds. The cruise assist is
                                                              available for use whenever the engines are
                        Controller                            running above 3000 rpm and  below  7000
                                                              rpm.
                                      1  2 3                  To activate the cruise assist:
                                                              (1) Push the remote control levers forward
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)                to open the throttle until the desired en-
                                      HOME  CANCEL
                                                                 gine speed is reached and both engines
                                                                 are operating at the same engine speed.
                                                              (2) Push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button
                                                                 or “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button. When
                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                                 the cruise assist is activated, “CRUISE
                                       4   5                     ASSIST” and  the cruise assist setting
                                                                 level will be displayed  under  the  boat
                                Name           Function
                                                                 speed.
                         1  “HOME” button  Displays the home
                                          screen. (See page
                                          102.)                        SE      S      SW
                         2  “VOLUME  –    Switches the joystick
                            (SCROLL)” but-  between the volume
                            ton           control mode and the
                                          navigation control
                                          mode. When the main
                                          switches are turned to              MPH
                                          the on position, the
                                          volume control mode             CRUISE ASSIST:
                                          is selected by default.
                         3  “CANCEL” but-  Deselects the current-                   1
                            ton           ly selected item.
                                                              1  Cruise assist setting level
                         4  “CRUISE/NO    Activate and set the
                            WAKE” (–) but-  cruise assist, no-wake
                            ton           mode, and reverse    Once the cruise assist is activated, the set
                         5  “CRUISE/NO    RPM control. (See the   engine speed can be increased by pushing
                            WAKE” (+) but-  following sections.)  the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button or de-
                            ton
                                                               creased by  pushing the  “CRUISE/NO
                                                               WAKE” (–)  button. However, the  adjust-
                                                               ment is limited to a maximum of 8 incre-
                                                               ments above or below the initial cruise
                                                               assist setting. Each time a button is
                                                               pushed, the engine speed will increase or
                                                               decrease approximately 100–200 rpm.


                                                                                               69]]></page><page Index="82"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 70  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                         While the cruise assist is activated, the en-  The no-wake mode can be set to 3 engine
                          gine speed can also be adjusted by operat-  speeds. To adjust the engine speed while the
                          ing the remote control levers.      no-wake  mode is activated, push the
                                                              “CRUISE/NO   WAKE”   (+)  button  or
                        To deactivate the cruise assist:      “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button.
                        Operate the remote control  levers  to de-  To deactivate the no-wake mode:
                        crease the engine speed to 3000 rpm or less.  Perform one of the following operations.
                        When “CRUISE ASSIST” and the cruise as-   Push  the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button
                        sist setting level disappear, the cruise assist  repeatedly until “No Wake” and  the no-
                        is deactivated.                        wake mode setting level disappears.
                                                               Push the remote control levers forward to
                        Operating the boat with a minimal      open the throttle.
                        wake (no-wake mode)
                        The no-wake mode is useful for operating the  Operating the boat in reverse with
                        boat at a steady speed with a minimal wake.  more thrust (reverse RPM control)
                        This is especially convenient when traveling  Engine speed in reverse is limited to approx-
                        in harbors, channels, or other areas posted  imately 4500 rpm. If more thrust is required
                        with low speed limits as “no wake zones”.  when the boat is traveling in reverse, use the
                        The no-wake mode can be used only when  reverse RPM control.  WARNING! Be  pre-
                        the engines are operating at idle speed.  pared to  reduce throttle as  soon as the
                        To activate the no-wake mode:         boat moves as desired.  Otherwise, the
                        (1) Put the remote control levers in the TDE  boat may become unstable, which could
                            position or forward position so that both  result in loss of control and an accident.
                            engines are operating at idle speed.  To activate the reverse RPM control:
                        (2) Push the  “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) but-  (1) Move the remote control levers  back-
                            ton. When the no-wake mode is activat-  ward so that the throttle is opened in re-
                            ed, “No Wake” and the no-wake mode   verse and both engines are operating at
                            setting level will be displayed under the  the same engine speed.
                            boat speed.                       (2) Increase the engine speed to 4500 rpm,
                                                                 and then push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE”
                                  SE      S      SW
                                                                 (+) button.
                                                              Once the reverse RPM control is activated,
                                                              pushing the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button
                                                              will increase the  available  engine speed by
                                                              approximately 500 rpm in 3 stages up to a
                                         MPH                  maximum of 6000 rpm, and pushing the
                                      No Wake:                “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button will decrease
                                                              the available engine speed. However, the ad-
                                            1                 justment is limited to these 3 increments.
                        1  No-wake mode setting level




                        70]]></page><page Index="83"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 71  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        To deactivate the reverse RPM control:
                        Operate the remote control  levers  to de-
                        crease the engine speed to less than
                        4500 rpm.


























































                                                                                               71]]></page><page Index="84"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 72  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                           Multi-function display elements



                                              1             2             1



                                                     NW      N      NE
                                         FUEL                                 DEPTH
                                        50  %           FLOAT MODE            0  Ft

                                                                 °F
                                                         Water Temp
                                           START                            HOUSE
                                           11.8  V                          11.8  V
                                           Bilge  Blower              Nav  Anchor

                                                            4    3


                        1  Static bar                         3  Center display
                        2  Screen tab bar                     4  Status indicator bar


































                        72]]></page><page Index="85"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 73  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Static bar





                                                        NW       NE
                                        FUEL                                  DEPTH
                                 1                                                     4
                                        50  %                                 0  Ft
                                                                                       5
                                 2                                                     6




                                 3                                                     7
                                            START                          HOUSE
                                            11.8  V                        11.8  V
                                           Bilge  Blower            Nav   Anchor



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Fuel level bar graph  Displays the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. Depending
                                                 on the amount of remaining fuel, the bar graph is displayed in 3
                                                 colors: blue, orange, and red.
                          2  Port engine tachometer  Displays the engine speed.
                          3  Start battery voltage val-  Displays the start battery voltage in a numerical format.
                             ue
                          4  Depth level         Displays the water depth in feet or meters. Depending on the wa-
                                                 ter depth, the bar graph is displayed in 3 colors: blue, orange, and
                                                 red.
                          5  Day/Night brightness  Switches between day brightness and night brightness. (See page
                                                 86.)
                          6  Starboard engine ta-  Displays the engine speed.
                             chometer
                          7  House battery voltage   Displays the house battery voltage in a numerical format.
                             value















                                                                                               73]]></page><page Index="86"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 74  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Center display


                                                  NW         N        NE

                                                       FLOAT MODE


                                                                   °F
                                                        Water Temp
                                                                            1



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Center display      Displays various information for each screen tab.

                        Screen tab bar
                                     1      2     3     4      5      6     7      8








                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Clock               Displays the time. Tap the clock to set the time. (See page 85.)
                          2  Home screen tab     Displays the home screen. (See page 76.)
                          3  Map screen tab      Displays the map screen. (See page 76.)
                          4  Trip screen tab     Displays the trip screen. (See page 80.)
                          5  Media screen tab    Displays the media screen. (See page 81.)
                          6  System control screen   Displays the system control screen. (See page 84.)
                             tab
                          7  Setting screen tab  Displays the setting screen. (See page 85.)
                          8  Warning mute button  Mutes the sound of the buzzer for a specific time depending on
                                                 the warnings present.













                        74]]></page><page Index="87"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 75  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Status indicator bar


                                      1       2             3             4       5

                                     Bilge  Blower                       Nav    Anchor



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Bilge pump indicator  Indicates the operation setting of the bilge pump. When the bilge
                                                 pump is turned off, the indicator will be gray, and when the bilge
                                                 pump is turned on, the indicator will be blue.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to change the bilge pump setting.
                          2  Blower indicator    Displays the operating status of the blowers. When the main
                                                 switches are turned to the on position, a 5-minute timer will be
                                                 displayed in this indicator while the blowers operate automatically.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the blowers on or off.
                          3  Warning icon bar    Displays the warning icons.
                                                 When a warning icon is displayed, tap the icon to display the
                                                 warning message for that icon.
                          4  Navigation light indicator  Displays the operating status of the navigation light mode. (When
                                                 the navigation light mode is activated, the bow light and anchor
                                                 light are turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the navigation light mode on
                                                 or off.
                          5  Anchor light indicator  Displays the operating status of the anchor light mode. (When the
                                                 anchor light mode is activated, only the anchor light is turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the anchor light mode on or
                                                 off.


























                                                                                               75]]></page><page Index="88"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 76  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                  Home screen                            Map screen
                        This screen displays the boat speed, current  This screen displays a map.
                        heading of the boat, and other information.

                         1        NW      N       NE

                                    RUNNING MODE

                         2
                                        MPH
                                                                                 MPH
                         3

                                                                   Item            Function
                                Name           Function                      Shows the direction of
                         1  Heading       Displays the heading               North at the top of the
                                          of the boat.                       screen, or the current
                                                                             course being traveled at
                         2  Boat speed*   Displays the boat                  the top of the screen.
                                          speed in miles per
                                          hour or kilometers per
                                          hour.                              Zooms out to display a
                         3  Cruise  as-   Displays the operating             more distant view of the
                            sist/no-wake   status of the cruise as-          map.
                            mode status in-  sist and no-wake                Zooms in to display a clos-
                            dicator       mode.                              er view of the map.
                                          When the cruise assist
                                          is activated, “CRUISE
                                          ASSIST” and the                    Opens the waypoint menu.
                                          cruise assist setting
                                          level will be displayed.
                                          When the no-wake
                                          mode is activated, “No             Opens the track menu.
                                          Wake” and the no-
                                          wake mode setting lev-
                                          el will be displayed.              Displays the Map Settings.
                        * When both engines are not running, the wa-
                          ter temperature will be displayed.














                        76]]></page><page Index="89"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 77  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Waypoint                              (3) Select  the  waypoint you want to use
                        Set a waypoint for a destination on the map.  from the list and tap “Go-To”.
                        Waypoints can be attached to any location.
                                                                          Waypoint Manager

                                      Waypoints                         AAD           EDIT
                                                                       Lat:       34.6892
                                                                       Lon:       137.5789
                                                                       Distance:    0.62 Ft.

                               Go-To        Add Waypoint          Close   Delete  View    Go-To
                                                                                           1
                                 1               2            1  “Go-To”
                        1  “Go-To”
                        2  “Add Waypoint”                     Track
                                                              Set the track and display the route on the
                        To add a Waypoint:                    map.
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the waypoint menu.
                        (2) Tap “Add Waypoint”.
                        (3) Enter the name of the waypoint and tap           Tracks
                            “Save”.
                                                                                           REC
                                      Add Waypoint
                                                                  Follow    Create Track  Record
                                          A   B
                                     A    B   C                     1          2          3
                                     B    C   D
                                                              1  “Follow”
                            Cancel                   Save     2  “Create Track”
                                                              3  “Record”
                                                     1
                        1  “Save”                             To create a track:
                                                              (1) Tap “  ” to open the track menu.
                        TIP:                                  (2) Tap “Create Track”.
                        Check the registered waypoint information  (3) Create a route on the map and tap “Do-
                        with the waypoint manager. (See page 79)  ne”.

                        Cruising to the destination:
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the waypoint menu.
                        (2) Tap “Go-To”.




                                                                                               77]]></page><page Index="90"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 78  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        (4) Enter the name of the track and  tap  (4) Tap “  ” and then tap “Stop”.
                            “Save”.

                                       Add Track                             Tracks

                                          A   B                       Stop Recording Track?
                                     A    B   C
                                                                   No                    Stop
                                     B    C   D
                                                                                          1
                            Cancel                   Save
                                                     1
                                                              1  “Stop”
                        1  “Save”
                                                              (5) Tap “Save”
                        TIP:
                        Check the registered track information with        Track Manager
                        the track manager. (See page 79)
                                                                     EGG
                                                                           Save Track?
                        To follow a track:                           Temp
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the track menu.        AMA
                        (2) Tap “Follow”.
                        (3) Select the track you want to use from the
                                                                Do Not Save               Save
                            list and tap “Follow”.
                                                                                           1
                                     Track Manager
                                                              1  “Save”
                                   EAC           EDIT
                                                              (6) Enter  the name of the track and  tap
                                  Distance:    2651.68 ft
                                                                 “Save”.
                                                              Map settings screen
                            Close   Delete   Hide    Follow   Perform settings for waypoints and  tracks,
                                                              etc. on the Map Settings screen.
                                                     1
                        1  “Follow”

                        To record a track:
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the track menu.
                        (2) Tap “Record”.
                        (3) Navigating the route registered as a truck
                            by boat.



                        78]]></page><page Index="91"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 79  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Waypoints                                  Item            Function
                        Perform waypoint management. Tap “Way-              Changes the color of the
                        points” to display “Waypoint Manager”.              waypoint.
                                                              EDIT          Changes the name of the
                                                                            waypoint.
                                     Waypoint Manager
                                                              Delete        Deletes the waypoint.
                                   AAD           EDIT         Show / Hide   Shows the track on the
                                                                            map. Hide will make that
                                  Lat:       34.6892                        track invisible.
                                  Lon:       137.5789         Follow        Display the route of the
                                                                            track on the map and start
                                  Distance:    0.62 Ft.
                                                                            navigating.
                            Close   Delete   View    Go-To
                                                              Satellite status
                                                              Display detectable satellites.
                             Item            Function
                                       Changes the color of the
                                       waypoint.                     Satellite Status  N
                         EDIT          Changes the name of the    SATELLITES     3
                                                                  9:47
                                       waypoint.                  Latitude:  35.6060
                         Delete        Deletes the waypoint.      Longitude:  -84.2541  W   E
                                                                  Op Mode:
                                                                       0.00
                         View          Views the waypoint on the   HDOP:  0.00
                                                                  VDOP:  0.00
                                       map.                       TDOP:  0.00
                                                                  SOG:  0.0
                         Go-To         Displays the route to the   COG:  0
                                                                                     S
                                       waypoint on the map.
                                                                 Close
                        Tracks
                        Perform track management. Tap “Tracks” to
                                                              Depth / Position
                        display “Track Manager”.
                                                              Perform settings  for contour lines and  safe
                                                              depths.
                                     Track Manager
                                   EAC           EDIT                      Depth / Position
                                  Distance:    2651.68 ft         DEPTH CONTOUR
                                                                    All  66ft  33ft  16ft  6ft  0ft
                                                                  SAFETY CONTOUR
                                                                    66ft  33ft  16ft  6ft  0ft
                            Close   Delete   Hide    Follow
                                                                 Close



                                                              To perform settings, select the desired depth.
                                                              Set depths are reflected on the map.

                                                                                               79]]></page><page Index="92"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 80  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Chart Setup                                      Trip screen
                        Perform settings for functions displayed on  This screen displays the hours of engine op-
                        the map.                              eration, fuel consumption, and other informa-
                                                              tion.
                                       Chart Setup
                                                                              1            2 3
                                                                      NW       N        NE
                               SHOW GRIDS     SHOW  TRACKS
                                                                     Economy :    0.0 MPG
                               SHOW TEXT      SHOW NAV AIDS
                                                                    Trip Distance:  0.0 Mi
                               SHOW WAYPOINTS  SHOW WAYPOINT NAMES
                                                                     Fuel Used :  0.0 Gal
                            Close                                    Fuel Flow :  0.0 GPH

                                                                                          Reset All
                        To perform settings, select the item you want  1  Menu
                        to display.                           2  Scrollbar
                                                              3  “Reset All” button

                                                              The menu displays the following items. Scroll
                                                              through the menu items using the scrollbar.
                                                                  Name             Function
                                                              Economy       Shows the average dis-
                                                                            tance that can be traveled
                                                                            on 1.0 gallon or 1.0 liter of
                                                                            fuel. When gallons are se-
                                                                            lected for the display units,
                                                                            the value is shown in miles
                                                                            and when liters are selected
                                                                            for the display units, the
                                                                            value is shown in kilome-
                                                                            ters.
                                                              Trip Distance  Shows the distance trav-
                                                                            eled by the boat in miles or
                                                                            kilometers since the item
                                                                            was last reset.
                                                              Fuel Used     Shows the total fuel that
                                                                            has been consumed by the
                                                                            port and starboard engines
                                                                            in gallons or liters.
                                                              Fuel Flow*    Shows the total fuel con-
                                                                            sumption of the port and
                                                                            starboard engines in gal-
                                                                            lons per hour or liters per
                                                                            hour.




                        80]]></page><page Index="93"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 81  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                             Name            Function                   Media screen
                         Water Temp*   Shows the ambient water   This screen can be used to receive a radio
                                       temperature in degrees   broadcast, connect to an external device us-
                                       Fahrenheit or degrees Cel-
                                       sius.                  ing Bluetooth wireless technology, and per-
                         Average Speed*  Shows the average boat   form other functions.
                                       speed in miles per hour or
                                       kilometers per hour.
                         Highest Speed*  Shows the highest speed of          Source
                                       the boat in miles per hour or
                                       kilometers per hour.            AM Radio    FM Radio
                         Port Engine   Shows the total number of
                         Hours*        hours that the port engine      Weather     Bluetooth
                                       has been running since the
                                       boat was new.                         Auxiliary
                         Stbd Engine   Shows the total number of
                         Hours*        hours that the starboard en-
                                       gine has been running since   Turn Off  Select a Source  Zone Control
                                       the boat was new.
                        * This item cannot be reset.               Item            Function
                                                              AM Radio       Switches the source to the
                                                                             AM radio tuner and dis-
                        To reset an item on the trip screen:                 plays the AM radio screen.
                        Touch and hold the “  ” of the item that  FM Radio   Switches the source to the
                        you want to reset for several seconds.               FM radio tuner and dis-
                                                                             plays the FM radio screen.
                        To reset all of the display items:    Weather        Switches the source to the
                                                                             weather radio tuner and
                        Touch the “Reset All” button to reset all of the     displays the weather radio
                        items.                                               screen.
                                                              Bluetooth      Switches the source to an
                                                                             external device connected
                                                                             using Bluetooth wireless
                                                                             technology, and displays
                                                                             the Bluetooth screen.
                                                              Auxiliary      Switches the source to the
                                                                             auxiliary device and dis-
                                                                             plays the auxiliary screen.
                                                              Turn Off       Turns the audio system on
                                                                             or off.
                                                              Zone Control   Displays the volume ad-
                                                                             justment screen for each
                                                                             zone.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              If multiple external devices are connected at
                                                              the same time, the audio system may not op-
                                                              erate properly. When switching from one ex-
                                                              ternal device to another one, disconnect the


                                                                                               81]]></page><page Index="94"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 82  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        currently  connected device,  and then con-  Item          Function
                        nect the other device.                               Increases the radio station
                                                                             frequency. Touch and hold
                                                                             this button to automatically
                        To change the volume:
                                                                             seek the next available ra-
                        The following slider is displayed in each            dio station.
                        screen.                               Source         Displays the media screen.
                        Use the slider control to change the volume.

                                         1                    To change the radio station frequency:
                                                              Tap “   ” or “  ” to tune to a receivable
                                                              frequency.

                        1  Slider control                     To save a radio station frequency to a preset
                                                              button:
                        TIP:                                  Tune the radio to the desired radio station,
                        The volume can also be adjusted by tapping  and then touch and hold the desired preset
                        the “   ” or “  ” button.             button for several seconds.

                        Radio screen (AM/FM)                                   1
                        You can receive a radio broadcast.             AM Radio       AM-1
                                                                   1    2    3    4    5
                                                                    1710
                                  AM Radio      AM-1                           P1
                              1    2    3    4    5
                               1710
                                                                           1710 kHz
                                          P1
                                      1710 kHz
                                                                 Source           MPH    Zone Control
                                                              1  Preset button
                            Source           MPH   Zone Control
                                                              Weather screen
                                                              You can receive a weather broadcast.
                              Item            Function
                                       Decreases the radio sta-
                                       tion frequency. Touch and
                                       hold this button to auto-        NOAA National Weather
                                       matically seek the next
                                       available radio station.
                                                                        CH 1 -0.000 kHz
                                       Decreases the radio sta-
                                       tion frequency.
                                                                   1   2   3   4   5   6   7
                                       Increases the radio station
                                       frequency.
                                                                 Source           MPH    Zone Control




                        82]]></page><page Index="95"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 83  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        To change the radio station, tap a preset but-  (3) Tap the “Connect” button, and the “Con-
                        ton.                                     firm Pairing on Device”  screen is  dis-
                                                                 played.
                        Bluetooth screen                      (4) Select “OK” for both the multi-function
                        Smartphones and other external devices that  display unit and the external device.
                        are compatible with Bluetooth can be con-
                        nected wirelessly to the audio system to lis-  To disconnect an external device, turn off the
                        ten to the audio tracks stored on the devices  Bluetooth function of the external device.
                        through the audio system’s speakers.
                                                              Auxiliary screen
                                                              Portable media players  and other external
                                 Bluetooth
                                                              devices can be connected to the audio sys-
                                      Best Of You             tem to listen to the audio tracks stored on the
                                      Foo Fighters
                                      In Your Honor           devices through the audio system’s speak-
                                                              ers.

                                                                             Auxiliary
                           Source            MPH   Zone Control

                              Item            Function
                                       Displays the external de-
                                       vice management screen.

                                       Displays information about   Source        MPH    Zone Control
                                       the current audio track.

                                                                                1
                        To connect an external device:
                        (1) Tap the “  ” button, and then select
                            “+Add Device”.
                        (2) Turn on the Bluetooth function of the ex-
                            ternal device, and  then search for  the
                            multi-function display unit of the boat.
                        TIP:
                        Make sure that other external devices have
                        their Bluetooth function disabled before be-  1  Auxiliary input jack
                        ginning the pairing  process to reduce  con-
                        nection issues.                       TIP:
                                                               You can adjust the volume level of  the
                                                               speakers using the multi-function display



                                                                                               83]]></page><page Index="96"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 84  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                          unit or the volume control of the external  System control screen
                          device.                             The system control screen can be used to
                         To select the audio tracks, use the external  turn the boat lights on and off.
                          device.                             When a light is turned on, it will be indicated
                                                              on the illustration of the boat shown on the
                        Zone control screen                   screen.
                        Perform volume adjustment for each zone.


                                      Zone Control

                                      100
                                100     100   100




                                                                  Courtesy
                            Back    Selected Zone: Interior

                                                                   Item            Function
                        To adjust the volume:                 Courtesy       Turns the courtesy lights
                        (1) Tap the highlighted part.                        on or off. (See page 32 for
                                                                             information on the location
                        (2) Adjust by moving the slider control to the
                                                                             of the courtesy lights.)
                            left or right.
                                                              Underwater     Turns the underwater lights
                        (3) Tap “Back”.                                      on or off.
                        TIP:                                  Docking        Turns the docking lights on
                        Zones that can be set differ depending on the        or off.
                        specifications.                       Tower          Turns the tower lights on or
                                                                             off.

                                                              To adjust the brightness of the lights:
                                                              Tap the item you want to adjust the bright-
                                                              ness for, and move the slider control left or
                                                              right to adjust.

                                                                               1



                                                              1  Slider control

                                                              TIP:
                                                              The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-
                                                              ping the “   ” or “    ” button.

                        84]]></page><page Index="97"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 85  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                  Setting screen              Time setting screen
                        The setting screen can be used to change the  Perform settings related to the time.
                        settings of the multi-function display unit.
                                                                              Time

                                        Menu                         12-Hour:    24-Hour:
                                  Time         Depth
                                                                     GMT Offset:    -4
                                  Unit       Brightness
                                                                   Daylight Saving Time:  Disabled
                                 Wellness     Language
                               Tuner Region  Auto Volume
                                                                 Back
                                                     Reset
                                                              To set the time:
                                                              (1) Select a 12 hour display or 24 hour dis-
                              Item            Function
                                                                 play.
                         Time          Displays the time setting
                                       screen.                (2) Tap “  ” or “  ” to adjust GMT off-
                         Depth         Displays the depth alarm   set.
                                       setting screen.        (3) Select to enable or disable daylight sav-
                         Unit          Displays the unit setting   ing time.
                                       screen.
                         Brightness    Displays the brightness
                                       setting screen.        Depth alarm setting screen
                                                              The water depth for the depth alarm can be
                         Wellness      Displays the maintenance
                                       setting screen.        set.
                         Language      Displays the language set-
                                       ting screen.                        Set Depth Alarm
                         Tuner Region  Displays the tuner region
                                       setting screen.
                         Auto Volume   Displays the auto volume               5.0 Ft
                                       setting screen.
                         Reset         Displays the factory reset
                                       screen.
                                                                 Back
                                                                               1
                                                              1  Slider control

                                                              To adjust the water depth setting:
                                                              (1) Move the slider control left or right.
                                                              TIP:
                                                               The water depth can also be adjusted by
                                                               tapping the “  ” or “  ” button.



                                                                                               85]]></page><page Index="98"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 86  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                         If the water depth is set to 0.0 m (0.0 ft), the
                          depth alarm will not operate.                        1

                        (2) Tap “Back” to complete the setting.
                                                              1  Slider control
                        Unit setting screen
                        The display units for the multi-function dis-  TIP:
                        play unit can be changed.             The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-
                                                              ping the “   ” or “    ” button.
                                        Set Unit
                                                              (3) Tap “Back”.
                                       U.S. Std
                                                              Maintenance setting screen
                                U.S. Std        Metric
                                                              This screen displays the number of hours that
                                                              the engines have been running since the last
                                                              maintenance.
                            Back
                                                                       Time Since Last Maintenance
                        Select “U.S. Std” or “Metric”.             Port Engine          0  Hrs

                        Brightness setting screen                  Starboard Engine     0  Hrs
                        The multi-function  display has a day mode
                        and a night mode.
                        The brightness can be set separately for the  Back                Reset
                        day mode and for the night mode.
                                                              After maintenance  is performed, reset  the
                                      Set Brightness          number of hours of operation as follows.

                                  Night:    30  Day:    90    To reset the number of hours of operation:
                                                              (1) Tap the “Reset” button.
                                                              (2) When the confirmation message ap-
                                                                 pears, tap the “YES” button to reset the
                                                                 number of hours of operation.
                            Back
                                                              TIP:
                                                              To return to the maintenance setting screen
                        To set the brightness:                without  resetting the number of hours, tap
                        (1) Set either “Night” or “Day”.      the “NO” button.
                        (2) Move the slider control left or right to ad-
                            just.


                        86]]></page><page Index="99"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 87  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Language setting screen               Auto Volume setting screen
                        The language for the  multi-function  display  Auto Volume will automatically control  the
                        unit can be changed.                  level of volume when overcoming wind or en-
                                                              gine noise.
                                      Set Language
                                                                         Auto Volume Settings
                                  English     Espanol
                                                                   Auto Volume Status:  Off
                                        Francais
                                                                      Intensity:    1

                            Back
                                                                 Back
                        To change the language, tap the desired lan-
                        guage.                                To turn on or off the auto volume, tap “Off”.
                                                              To control the intensity of auto volume, tap
                        Tuner Region setting screen           the up and down arrows.
                        Set the region in which the multi-function dis-  To return to the menu screen, tap “Back”.
                        play unit will be used.
                                                              Factory reset screen
                                                              This screen can be set to the factory settings.
                                      Tuner Region

                                North America  South America
                                                                     Are you sure you would like to reset to
                                                                           factory settings?
                                  Japan       Taiwan
                                                                        You cannot undo this action!
                            Back

                        To change the tuner region, tap the desired  Cancel               Conﬁrm
                        region.
                                                              To reset to the factory setting:
                                                              (1) Tap “Confirm”.
                                                              (2) When the confirmation message ap-
                                                                 pears, tap the “YES” button.










                                                                                               87]]></page><page Index="100"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 88  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                                       Warnings
                        If a malfunction or fault occurs, a warning buzzer will sound and a warning icon and warning
                        message will be displayed on the center display.
                        If the displayed warning message includes instructions, follow those instructions. If you have
                        any questions, consult a Yamaha Boat Dealer.



                                                    NW
                                                    NW       N N     NENE
                                      F
                                                                                DEPTHTHH
                                      FUEL
                                      F FUEL                                    DEPTH
                                                          Check Engine !
                                  1   50 50 50 5  % % %  FLOAT MODE E            0 0 0  Ft F F Ft t t
                                                        F
                                                         L
                                                           AT M
                                                              O
                                                         O
                                                               D
                                  2                Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                                                                  °F °F
                                                                        OK
                                                        W ater  T em
                                                        Water Tempp
                                          TAR
                                         STARTT                               HOUSEE S
                                         S
                                                                              HO
                                                                               U
                                          1.
                                         1 11.8 8  V V                        11. 8  V V
                                                                              11.8
                                                                               h
                                                                             A
                                                                              nc
                                                                        N
                                               Bl
                                         Bilge
                                                ower
                                         Bil ge  Blower                 Navav  Anchor o r
                        1  Warning title
                        2  Message
                        Warning example
                                    Warning title                         Message
                         Check Engine                      Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Low Oil Pressure                  Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Check Battery                     Low Voltage detected.
                                                           Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         GPS Communication Failure         Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Transducer Communication Failure  Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Stereo Remote Communication Failure  Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         PDM Communication Failure         Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Engine Over Temperature           Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Low Fuel                          Fuel level is low. Please refuel soon.
                         Low Fuel Warning                  Fuel level is less than 10%.
                         Depth Warning                     Depth alarm limit reached.

                        88]]></page><page Index="101"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 89  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Check engine warning                  Check that water comes out of the outlets
                        If an engine sensor malfunction or a short cir-  while the engines are running, particularly
                        cuit is detected, a warning will appear on the  while applying throttle. If you do not see any
                        multi-function display and the buzzer will  water at the outlets, cooling water may not be
                        sound. If a fault is detected for the engines,  circulating in the engines.
                        “Check Engine” will be displayed. If this oc-
                        curs, reduce the  engine speed,  return to
                        shore, and have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check
                        the engine.

                        Low oil pressure warning
                        If the oil pressure does not rise to specifica-
                        tion, a warning will appear on the multi-func-
                        tion display and the buzzer will sound. If a    2
                        fault is  detected for the engines, “Low Oil  1
                        Pressure” will be displayed. At the same time,  1  Cooling water pilot outlet (starboard engine)
                        the engine speed is automatically limited to  2  Cooling water pilot outlet (port engine)
                        help prevent damage. If this occurs, reduce
                        the engine speed, return to shore or maneu-  TIP:
                        ver to a safe location, and check the engine  If the cooling water passages in the engines
                        oil level. (See page 150 for engine oil level  are dry, it will take about 20 seconds for wa-
                        checking procedures.)                 ter to reach the pilot outlets after starting.
                        If the oil level is low, add enough engine oil to
                        raise it to the proper level. If the oil level is suf-  If water is not circulating, something may be
                        ficient, have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the  clogging the intake grates. Refer to “Jet
                        engine.                               pump clean-out procedure” on page 209.

                        Over temperature warning
                        This model is equipped with an over temper-
                        ature warning system. If the engines start to
                        overheat, a warning will appear on the multi-
                        function display and the buzzer will sound. If
                        the engine  is  over heating, “Engine Over
                        Temperature” will be displayed. At the same
                                                                        1
                        time, the engine speed is automatically limit-
                        ed to help prevent damage. If this occurs, im-
                        mediately reduce the engine speed, return to
                                                              1  Intake grate
                        shore  or maneuver to a safe location,  and
                        check for water discharge at the cooling wa-
                        ter pilot outlets. There are cooling water pilot
                        outlets on the  starboard  side of the  hull.



                                                                                               89]]></page><page Index="102"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 90  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation


                         NOTICE                               Low fuel level warning
                                                              If “Low Fuel” appears on the multi-function
                        If the  cause of overheating  cannot be  display, refill the fuel tank as soon as possi-
                        found and corrected, take special precau-  ble. (See page 147 for information on filling
                        tions to avoid major engine damage while  the fuel tank.)
                        you return to shore.
                        Single engine overheating — Shut off the  Depth warning
                        overheating engine and use the properly  If the boat enters an area that is shallower
                        running engine to return to shore. Operate  than the water depth set for the depth alarm,
                        at no-wake speed (8 km/h, 5 mph) to pre-  the depth warning will be activated and the
                        vent water from flooding the non-operat-  buzzer will sound.
                        ing engine through the water intake. See  If the warning is activated, move the boat to
                        page 70 for  information on the no-wake  an area that is deeper than the water depth
                        mode.                                 set for the depth alarm. (See page 85 for in-
                        Both  engines overheating  — If getting a  formation on setting the depth alarm.)
                        tow from another vessel is not possible,
                        operate both engines just slightly above
                        idle while you return to shore. If you can be
                        towed, refer to “Towing the boat” on page
                        220.

                        Battery voltage warning
                        If “Check Battery” appears on the multi-func-
                        tion display and the buzzer will sound, check
                        the battery connections. If the battery connec-
                        tions are clean and tight and the warning indi-
                        cation continues, have a Yamaha Boat Dealer
                        check the charging system.

                        Communication error warning
                        If a communication error is detected for the
                        GPS function, a sensor, or other device, a
                        warning will appear on the multi-function dis-
                        play and the buzzer will sound. If this occurs,
                        reduce the engine speed, return to shore, and
                        have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the boat.










                        90]]></page><page Index="103"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 91  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                           Helm controls (222SE / 222SD)

                                                                                 56     7






                                  2    3         4
                           1
                                                                                 89 10





















                              11









                        1  Wireless charger
                        2  Aux input
                        3  USB charger
                        4  Multi-function display unit
                        5  “ACC”1 switch
                        6  “BLOWER” switch
                        7  “HORN” switch
                        8  “ACC”2 switch
                        9  “NAV LIGHTS” switch
                        10 “BILGE” switch
                        11 Controller


                                                                                               91]]></page><page Index="104"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 92  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Switch panel                          “ACC”1/“ACC”2 switch
                        In addition to touching the multi-function dis-  These switches can be used to operate an
                        play directly, you can use the switches to op-  electronic device that is installed later as an
                        erate various functions.              accessory.
                                                              For more information, contact a  Yamaha
                                          1   2    3          Boat Dealer.

                                                              “NAV LIGHTS” switch
                                                              Turns the navigation lights (anchor light and
                                                              bow light) on or off. Each time the switch is
                                                              pushed, the combination of lights that are on
                                                              or off changes in the following 3 patterns.
                                                              Switch   Anchor   Bow   Multi-function
                                          4   5    6          light   light  light   display
                                                              Off     Off    Off     -
                        1  “ACC”1 switch
                                                              On      On     On
                        2  “BLOWER” switch                                               Nav
                        3  “HORN” switch
                                                              On      On     Off
                        4  “ACC”2 switch                                                Anchor
                        5  “NAV LIGHTS” switch
                        6  “BILGE” switch
                        “HORN” switch
                        Activates the horn. The horn can be used to
                        signal other boats as required by the “Rules
                        of the road”. (See page 22.)
                        The switch light comes on while the horn is
                        operating.

                        “BILGE” switch
                        Turns the bilge pump on or off. (See page
                        153.)
                        The switch light comes on while the bilge
                        pump is operating.
                        TIP:
                        Even if the bilge pump is turned off, the pump
                        will operate every 2 minutes when the house
                        battery switch is in the on position.

                        “BLOWER” switch
                        Turns the blowers on or off. (See page 163.)
                        The switch light comes on while the blowers
                        are operating.


                        92]]></page><page Index="105"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 93  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                           Multi-function display unit        Volume control mode
                                    operation                 Turn the joystick knob to change the audio
                                                              volume.
                        Because the multi-function display unit is
                        equipped with a touch screen, you can touch
                        the display directly to operate  the display
                        functions.                                            VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                        In addition to touching the display, you can       HOME   CANCEL
                        use the joystick to operate the display func-
                        tions.                                                         1

                        Touching the multi-function display                 CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                                NO WAKE
                                                                            NO WAKE
                                                              1  Joystick knob
                                                 RUNNING MODE
                                      SE  S  SW
                             FUEL                    DEPTH
                             100 %                   .8 9  ft  Navigation control mode
                              19                    19
                                  x1000 rpm     x1000 rpm     (1) Turn the joystick knob to change the se-
                                         MPH
                              START                 HOUSE        lected setting or item.
                              13.0  V  9          9  13.0  V
                                   Bilge  Blower  Nav  Anchor
                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL
                        Using the joystick                                             1
                        This joystick has the following two operation
                        modes.
                                                                            CRUISE  CRUISE
                         Volume control mode
                                                                            NO WAKE
                                                                                NO WAKE
                         Navigation control mode
                        Push the  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button to
                                                              1  Joystick knob
                        switch the operation mode.
                                         1                    (2) Push the joystick knob to select an item
                                                                 or confirm a setting.
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL



                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE


                        1  “VOLUME–(SCROLL)” button


                                                                                               93]]></page><page Index="106"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 94  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                                                     Operation buttons
                                                              In addition to touching the multi-function dis-
                                                              play directly, you can use the operation but-
                                         VOLUME
                                         (SCROLL)
                                      HOME  CANCEL            tons and the controller to operate  various
                                                              functions.
                                                              Controller
                                       CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                           1   2 3
                                       NO WAKE  NO WAKE
                                                                              VOLUME
                                                                              (SCROLL)
                                                                           HOME   CANCEL
                        TIP:
                        Although the procedures in this manual ex-
                        plain how to make selections by touching the
                        display, you can also make selections using         CRUISE  CRUISE
                                                                                NO WAKE
                                                                            NO WAKE
                        the joystick knob.
                                                                             4   5
                                                                      Name          Function
                                                               1  “HOME” button  Displays the home
                                                                               screen. (See page
                                                                               102.)
                                                               2  “VOLUME  –   Switches the joystick
                                                                  (SCROLL)” but-  between the volume
                                                                  ton          control mode and the
                                                                               navigation control
                                                                               mode. When the main
                                                                               switches are turned to
                                                                               the on position, the
                                                                               volume control mode
                                                                               is selected by default.
                                                               3  “CANCEL” but-  Deselects the current-
                                                                  ton          ly selected item.
                                                               4  “CRUISE/NO   Activate and set the
                                                                  WAKE” (–) but-  cruise assist, no-wake
                                                                  ton          mode, and reverse
                                                               5  “CRUISE/NO   RPM control. (See the
                                                                  WAKE” (+) but-  following sections.)
                                                                  ton


                                                              Operating the boat at a steady speed
                                                              (cruise assist)
                                                              The cruise assist feature is for steady engine
                                                              speed operation when the boat is traveling
                                                              above no-wake speeds. The cruise assist is


                        94]]></page><page Index="107"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 95  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        available for  use whenever  the engines are  To deactivate the cruise assist:
                        running above  3000  rpm and below  7000  Operate the remote control  levers  to  de-
                        rpm.                                  crease the engine speed to 3000 rpm or less.
                        To activate the cruise assist:        When “CRUISE ASSIST” and the cruise as-
                        (1) Push the remote control levers forward  sist setting level disappear, the cruise assist
                            to open the throttle until the desired en-  is deactivated.
                            gine speed is reached and both engines
                            are operating at the same engine speed.  Operating the boat with a minimal
                        (2) Push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button  wake (no-wake mode)
                            or “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button. When  The no-wake mode is useful for operating the
                            the cruise  assist is activated,  “CRUISE  boat at a steady speed with a minimal wake.
                            ASSIST” and  the cruise assist  setting  This is especially convenient when traveling
                            level  will be displayed under  the boat  in harbors, channels, or other areas posted
                            speed.                            with low speed limits as “no wake zones”.
                                                              The no-wake mode can be  activated only
                                  SE      S      SW           when the engines are operating at idle speed.
                                                              To activate the no-wake mode:
                                                              (1) Put the remote control levers in the TDE
                                                                 position or forward position so that both
                                                                 engines are operating at idle speed.
                                         MPH                  (2) Push the  “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) but-
                                                                 ton. When the no-wake mode is activat-
                                    CRUISE ASSIST:
                                                                 ed, “No Wake” and the no-wake mode
                                              1                  setting level will be displayed under the
                                                                 boat speed.
                        1  Cruise assist setting level
                                                                       SE      S      SW
                         Once the cruise assist is activated, the set
                          engine speed can be increased by pushing
                          the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button or de-
                          creased by  pushing the  “CRUISE/NO
                          WAKE” (–) button. However, the  adjust-
                          ment is limited to a maximum of 8 incre-            MPH
                          ments above or below the initial cruise           No Wake:
                          assist setting. Each  time a button is
                          pushed, the engine speed will increase or              1
                          decrease approximately 100–200 rpm.  1  No-wake mode setting level
                         While the cruise assist is activated, the en-
                          gine speed can also be adjusted by operat-  The no-wake mode can be set to 3 engine
                          ing the remote control levers.      speeds. To adjust the engine speed while the
                                                              no-wake  mode is activated, push the




                                                                                               95]]></page><page Index="108"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 96  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        “CRUISE/NO   WAKE”    (+)  button  or
                        “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button.
                        To deactivate the no-wake mode:
                        Perform one of the following operations.
                         Push the “CRUISE/NO  WAKE” (–) button
                          repeatedly until  “No Wake” and  the no-
                          wake mode setting level disappears.
                         Push the remote control levers forward to
                          open the throttle.

                        Operating the boat in reverse with
                        more thrust (reverse RPM control)
                        Engine speed in reverse is limited to approx-
                        imately 4500 rpm. If more thrust is required
                        when the boat is traveling in reverse, use the
                        reverse RPM control.  WARNING! Be pre-
                        pared to reduce throttle as soon  as the
                        boat moves  as desired.  Otherwise, the
                        boat may become unstable, which could
                        result in loss of control and an accident.
                        To activate the reverse RPM control:
                        (1) Move the remote control levers back-
                            ward so that the throttle is opened in re-
                            verse and both engines are operating at
                            the same engine speed.
                        (2) Increase the engine speed to 4500 rpm,
                            and then push the “CRUISE/NO WAKE”
                            (+) button.
                        Once the reverse RPM control is activated,
                        pushing the “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (+) button
                        will increase the available  engine speed by
                        approximately 500 rpm in 3 stages up to a
                        maximum  of 6000 rpm, and pushing  the
                        “CRUISE/NO WAKE” (–) button will decrease
                        the available engine speed. However, the ad-
                        justment is limited to these 3 increments.
                        To deactivate the reverse RPM control:
                        Operate the remote control  levers  to de-
                        crease the engine speed to less than 4500
                        rpm.




                        96]]></page><page Index="109"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 97  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                           Multi-function display elements

                              1         2          3        4                   5    6    7
                                                                                RUNNING MODE
                                                     SE     S      SW
                           FUEL                                                             DEPTH
                           100 %                                                            .8 9  ft

                               19                                                        19
                                        x1000 rpm                             x1000 rpm
                                                           MPH
                              START                                                     HOUSE
                              13.0  V  9                                           9    13.0  V
                                          Bilge  Blower               Nav  Anchor
                           16 15 14     13                 12                 11    10   9   8
                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Clock               Shows the time. Tap the clock to set the time. (See page 112.)
                          2  Port engine tachometer  Shows the engine speed.
                          3  Center display      Shows various information for each screen tab.
                          4  Screen tab bar      Shows the tabs for the various screens that can be shown on the
                                                 center display.
                          5  Starboard engine ta-  Shows the engine speed.
                             chometer
                          6  Day/Night brightness  Switches between day brightness and night brightness. (See page
                                                 86.)
                          7  Mode status         Shows the current mode. (See page 101.)
                          8  Depth level bar graph  Shows the water depth in feet or meters. Depending on the depth
                                                 alarm setting and detected water depth, the color of the bar graph
                                                 segments changes.
                          9  House battery voltage  Shows the house battery voltage in a bar graph format and numer-
                                                 ical format.
                         10  Operation mode button  Switches the operation mode. This button can be used only when
                                                 the remote control levers are in the neutral position. (See page 101.)
                         11  Starboard shift indicator  Shows the current shift position for the starboard jet thrust nozzle.
                                                 This indicator appears only when the engine is running.
                         12  Status indicator bar  Shows the operating status of various functions and displays warn-
                                                 ings.
                         13  Port shift indicator  Shows the current shift position for the port jet thrust nozzle. This
                                                 indicator appears only when the engine is running.
                         14  Warning mute button  Mutes the sound of the buzzer for a specific time depending on the
                                                 warnings present.
                         15  Start battery voltage  Shows the start battery voltage in a bar graph format and numeri-
                                                 cal format.




                                                                                               97]]></page><page Index="110"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 98  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation


                                    Name                             Function
                         16  Fuel level bar graph  Shows the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. Depending on
                                                 the amount of remaining fuel, the color of the bar graph segments
                                                 changes.



























































                        98]]></page><page Index="111"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 99  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        If the multi-function display unit is turned on while the engines are stopped, the display unit
                        will enter the float mode.
                        When the multi-function display unit is in the float mode, the following items are different than
                        they are in the running mode.
                                                  1                   2

                                                                        FLOAT MODE

                                FUEL                                                  DEPTH
                                 100 %       FM Radio                                 .8 9  ft

                                                                   Water Temp
                                      19  107.7 MHz                               19
                                                Her By                    °F



                                     START                                        HOUSE
                                    13.0  V  9                              9    13.0  V
                                                   Bilge  B       Anchor



                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Audio system function  Shows the selected function of the audio system.
                          2  Water temperature   Shows the ambient water temperature in degrees Fahrenheit or
                                                 degrees Celsius.


                        Screen tab bar
                                          1     2     3     4     5     6     7




                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Home screen tab     Displays the home screen. (See page 102.)
                          2  Map screen tab      Displays the map screen. (See page 102.)
                          3  Trip screen tab     Displays the trip screen. (See page 106.)
                          4  Drive control screen tab  Displays the drive control screen. (See page 107.)
                          5  Media screen tab    Displays the media screen. (See page 108.)
                          6  System control screen   Displays the system control screen. (See page 111.)
                             tab
                          7  Setting screen tab  Displays the setting screen. (See page 112.)




                                                                                               99]]></page><page Index="112"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 100  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Status indicator bar

                                        1      2            3            4      5

                                       Bilge  Blower                    Nav   Anchor

                                    Name                             Function
                          1  Bilge pump indicator  Shows the operating status of the bilge pump. When the bilge
                                                 pump is stopped, the indicator will be gray, and when the bilge
                                                 pump is operating, the indicator will be blue.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to change the bilge pump setting.
                          2  Blower indicator    Shows the operating status of the blowers. When the house bat-
                                                 tery switch is turned to the on position, a 5-minute timer will be
                                                 shown in this indicator while the blowers operate automatically.
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the blowers on or off.
                          3  Warning icon bar    Displays the warning icons.
                                                 When a warning icon is displayed, tap the icon to display the
                                                 warning message for that icon.
                          4  Navigation light indicator  Shows the operating status of the navigation light mode. (When
                                                 the navigation light mode is activated, the bow light and anchor
                                                 light are turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the navigation light mode on
                                                 or off.
                          5  Anchor light indicator  Shows the operating status of the anchor light mode. (When the
                                                 anchor light mode is activated, only the anchor light is turned on.)
                                                 You can also tap this indicator to turn the anchor light mode on or
                                                 off.






























                        100]]></page><page Index="113"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 101  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Operation mode                        DRiVE mode “  ” (222SD)
                        When the engines are running and both re-  Both engines are operated at the same en-
                        mote control levers are in the neutral position,  gine speed and  the throttle  and shifting of
                        the operation mode can be changed by tap-  both engines are controlled using the left and
                        ping the operation mode button.       right throttle/shift paddles. “DRiVE” is shown
                                                              for the mode status.
                                         1     2
                                                              Use this mode to make small throttle adjust-
                                                              ments  when operating  the boat at  slow
                                        RUNNING MODE
                                                              speeds, such as when docking. (See page 47
                              SW
                               NE
                                                  DEPTH       for information on the throttle/shift paddles.)
                                                  .8 9  ft
                                               19
                                       x1000 rpm              TIP:
                                                               If the remote control levers are moved from
                          H
                                               HOUSE           the neutral position to the forward or re-
                                           9   13.0  V
                                 Nav  Anchor                   verse position while the throttle/shift pad-
                                                               dles are not being operated, the operation
                        1  Mode status
                        2  Operation mode button               mode will change to the running mode.
                                                               When the DRiVE mode is activated, the en-
                        Float mode                             gine speed will be controlled.
                        Both engines are stopped. “FLOAT-MODE”
                        is shown for the mode status.
                        The audio system function and water temper-
                        ature are shown instead of the port and star-
                        board tachometers.

                        Running mode “  ”
                        The port and starboard remote control levers
                        control the throttle and shifting for their re-
                        spective engines.  “RUNNING-MODE” is
                        shown for the mode status.

                        Single lever mode “  ”
                        Both engines are operated at the same en-
                        gine  speed and the throttle  and shifting of
                        both  engines are  controlled using only  the
                        port remote control lever. “SINGLE-LEVER”
                        is shown for the mode status.
                        The starboard remote control lever is not
                        used.






                                                                                             101]]></page><page Index="114"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 102  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                  Home screen                            Map screen
                        This screen shows the boat speed, current  This screen displays a map.
                        heading of the boat, and other information.

                         1        NW      N       NE

                                    RUNNING MODE
                         2

                                        MPH
                                                                                 MPH
                         3
                                                                   Item            Function
                                Name           Function                      Expands the size of the
                         1  Heading       Displays the heading               map, or returns it to the
                                          of the boat.                       original size.
                         2  Boat speed*   Displays the boat                  Shows the direction of
                                          speed in miles per                 North at the top of the
                                          hour or kilometers per             screen, or the current
                                          hour.                              course being traveled at
                                                                             the top of the screen.
                         3  Cruise  as-   Displays the operating
                            sist/no-wake   status of the cruise as-
                            mode status in-  sist and no-wake                Zooms out to display a
                            dicator       mode.                              more distant view of the
                                          When the cruise assist             map.
                                          is activated, “CRUISE
                                          ASSIST” and the                    Zooms in to display a clos-
                                          cruise assist setting              er view of the map.
                                          level will be displayed.
                                          When the no-wake
                                          mode is activated, “No             Opens the waypoint menu.
                                          Wake” and the no-
                                          wake mode setting lev-
                                          el will be displayed.              Opens the track menu.
                        * When both engines are not running, the wa-
                         ter temperature will be displayed.                  Displays the Map Settings.















                        102]]></page><page Index="115"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 103  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Waypoint                              (3) Select  the  waypoint you want to use
                        Set a waypoint for a destination on the map.  from the list and tap “Go-To”.
                        Waypoints can be attached to any location.
                                                                          Waypoint Manager

                                      Waypoints                         AAD           EDIT
                                                                       Lat:       34.6892
                                                                       Lon:       137.5789
                                                                       Distance:    0.62 Ft.

                               Go-To        Add Waypoint          Close   Delete  View    Go-To
                                                                                           1
                                 1               2            1  “Go-To”
                        1  “Go-To”
                        2  “Add Waypoint”                     Track
                                                              Set the track and display the route on the
                        To add a Waypoint:                    map.
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the waypoint menu.
                        (2) Tap “Add Waypoint”.
                                                                             Tracks
                        (3) Enter the name of the waypoint and tap
                            “Save”.
                                                                                           REC
                                      Add Waypoint
                                                                  Follow    Create Track  Record
                                          A   B
                                                                    1          2          3
                                     A    B   C
                                     B    C   D
                                                              1  “Follow”
                            Cancel                   Save     2  “Create Track”
                                                              3  “Record”
                                                     1
                                                              To create a track:
                        1  “Save”
                                                              (1) Tap “  ” to open the track menu.
                        TIP:                                  (2) Tap “Create Track”.
                        Check the registered waypoint information  (3) Create a route on the map and tap “Do-
                        with the waypoint manager. (See page 105)  ne”.

                        Cruising to the destination:
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the waypoint menu.
                        (2) Tap “Go-To”.




                                                                                             103]]></page><page Index="116"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 104  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        (4) Enter the name of the track and  tap  (4) Tap “  ” and then tap “Stop”.
                            “Save”.
                                       Add Track                             Tracks

                                                                      Stop Recording Track?
                                          A   B
                                     A    B   C
                                                                   No                    Stop
                                     B    C   D
                                                                                          1
                            Cancel                   Save
                                                     1        1  “Stop”
                        1  “Save”
                                                              (5) Tap “Save”
                        TIP:
                                                                           Track Manager
                        Check the registered track information with
                        the track manager. (See page 105)            EGG   Save Track?
                                                                     Temp
                        To follow a track:
                                                                     AMA
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the track menu.
                        (2) Tap “Follow”.
                        (3) Select the track you want to use from the
                                                                Do Not Save               Save
                            list and tap “Follow”.
                                                                                           1
                                     Track Manager
                                                              1  “Save”
                                   EAC           EDIT
                                                              (6) Enter  the name of the track and  tap
                                  Distance:    2651.68 ft        “Save”.

                                                              Map settings screen
                                                              Perform settings for waypoints and  tracks,
                            Close   Delete   Hide    Follow
                                                              etc. on the Map Settings screen.
                                                     1
                        1  “Follow”
                        To record a track:
                        (1) Tap “   ” to open the track menu.
                        (2) Tap “Record”.
                        (3) Navigating the route registered as a truck
                            by boat.




                        104]]></page><page Index="117"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 105  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Waypoints                                  Item            Function
                        Perform waypoint management. Tap “Way-              Changes the color of the
                        points” to display “Waypoint Manager”.              waypoint.


                                     Waypoint Manager         EDIT          Changes the name of the
                                                                            waypoint.
                                   AAD           EDIT         Delete        Deletes the waypoint.
                                                              Show / Hide   Shows the track on the
                                  Lat:       34.6892                        map. Hide will make that
                                  Lon:       137.5789                       track invisible.
                                  Distance:    0.62 Ft.       Follow        Display the route of the
                                                                            track on the map and start
                                                                            navigating.
                            Close   Delete   View    Go-To

                                                              Satellite status
                             Item            Function
                                                              Display detectable satellites.
                                       Changes the color of the
                                       waypoint.
                                                                     Satellite Status  N
                         EDIT          Changes the name of the    SATELLITES     3
                                       waypoint.                  9:47
                                                                  Latitude:  35.6060
                         Delete        Deletes the waypoint.      Longitude:  -84.2541
                                                                  Op Mode:  0.00  W         E
                         View          Views the waypoint on the   HDOP:  0.00
                                                                  VDOP:  0.00
                                       map.                       TDOP:  0.00
                                                                  SOG:  0.0
                         Go-To         Displays the route to the   COG:  0
                                       waypoint on the map.                          S
                                                                 Close
                        Tracks
                        Perform track management. Tap “Tracks” to
                                                              Depth / Position
                        display “Track Manager”.
                                                              Perform settings  for contour lines and  safe
                                                              depths.
                                     Track Manager
                                   EAC           EDIT                      Depth / Position

                                  Distance:    2651.68 ft         DEPTH CONTOUR
                                                                    All  66ft  33ft  16ft  6ft  0ft
                                                                  SAFETY CONTOUR
                                                                    66ft  33ft  16ft  6ft  0ft
                            Close   Delete   Hide    Follow
                                                                 Close






                                                                                             105]]></page><page Index="118"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 106  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        To perform settings, select the desired depth.   Trip screen
                        Set depths are reflected on the map.  This screen displays the hours of engine op-
                                                              eration, fuel consumption, and other informa-
                        Chart Setup                           tion.
                        Perform settings for functions displayed on
                        the map.                                              1            2 3
                                                                      NW       N        NE
                                                                     Economy :
                                       Chart Setup                                0.0 MPG
                                                                    Trip Distance:  0.0 Mi
                               SHOW GRIDS     SHOW  TRACKS
                                                                     Fuel Used :  0.0 Gal
                               SHOW TEXT      SHOW NAV AIDS
                                                                     Fuel Flow :  0.0 GPH
                               SHOW WAYPOINTS  SHOW WAYPOINT NAMES
                                                                                          Reset All
                            Close
                                                              1  Menu
                                                              2  Scrollbar
                                                              3  “Reset All” button
                        To perform settings, select the item you want
                        to display.                           The menu displays the following items. Scroll
                                                              through the menu items using the scrollbar.
                                                                  Name             Function
                                                              Economy       Shows the average dis-
                                                                            tance that can be traveled
                                                                            on 1.0 gallon or 1.0 liter of
                                                                            fuel. When gallons are se-
                                                                            lected for the display units,
                                                                            the value is shown in miles
                                                                            and when liters are selected
                                                                            for the display units, the
                                                                            value is shown in kilome-
                                                                            ters.
                                                              Trip Distance  Shows the distance trav-
                                                                            eled by the boat in miles or
                                                                            kilometers since the item
                                                                            was last reset.
                                                              Fuel Used     Shows the total fuel that
                                                                            has been consumed by the
                                                                            port and starboard engines
                                                                            in gallons or liters.
                                                              Fuel Flow*    Shows the total fuel con-
                                                                            sumption of the port and
                                                                            starboard engines in gal-
                                                                            lons per hour or liters per
                                                                            hour.





                        106]]></page><page Index="119"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 107  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation


                             Name            Function               Drive control screen
                         Water Temp*   Shows the ambient water   This screen can be used to set a target speed
                                       temperature in degrees   for the boat, increase the set speed.
                                       Fahrenheit or degrees Cel-
                                       sius.
                         Average Speed*  Shows the average boat    WKS  WKB
                                       speed in miles per hour or   Target Speed  21.0
                                       kilometers per hour.
                         Highest Speed*  Shows the highest speed of   Acceleration  Fast
                                       the boat in miles per hour or
                                       kilometers per hour.        Ballast      0  0   0
                         Port Engine   Shows the total number of
                         Hours*        hours that the port engine               Port  Stbd
                                       has been running since the
                                       boat was new.              Set                      Save
                         Stbd Engine   Shows the total number of
                         Hours*        hours that the starboard en-
                                       gine has been running since
                                       the boat was new.      To activate the drive control:
                                                              (1) Tap the tab you want to set.
                        * This item cannot be reset.
                                                              (2) Tap the target speed.
                                                              (3) To set  the speed,  tap each digit and
                        To reset an item on the trip screen:
                                                                 scroll  up or down, and  then tap  the
                        Touch and hold the “  ” of the item that
                                                                 “Back” button.
                        you want to reset for several seconds.
                        To reset all of the display items:
                        Touch the “Reset All” button to reset all of the
                        items.
                                                                          8         0

                                                                          9         1




                                                              (4) Tap the desired acceleration profile.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              You can select from “Manual”, “Slow”, and
                                                              “Medium”.

                                                              (5) Tap the “Save” button.
                                                              (6) Select the characters you want to  set,
                                                                 tap the “Save” button.
                                                              (7) After setting the preceding items, tap the
                                                                 “Set” button.



                                                                                             107]]></page><page Index="120"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 108  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        (8) Move the remote control levers to the ful-  Media screen
                            ly open position.                 This screen can be used to receive a radio
                        TIP:                                  broadcast, connect to an external device us-
                         If the remote control levers are moved  ing Bluetooth wireless technology, and per-
                          slowly to the fully open position, the boat  form other functions.
                          may not accelerate according to the select-
                          ed acceleration profile or reach the set tar-
                                                                             Source
                          get speed.
                         If the single lever mode is activated, move  AM Radio    FM Radio
                          only the remote control lever for the port
                                                                       Weather     Bluetooth
                          engine to the fully open position. (See page
                          101  for information on the single lever           Auxiliary
                          mode button.)
                         222SD: While the DRiVE mode is activated,
                                                                 Turn Off   Select a Source  Zone Control
                          the drive control mode cannot be used.
                                                                   Item            Function
                        To deactivate the drive control:
                                                              AM Radio       Switches the source to the
                        (1) Return the remote control levers to the
                                                                             AM radio tuner and dis-
                            neutral position.                                plays the AM radio screen.
                        (2) Tap the “CANCEL” button.          FM Radio       Switches the source to the
                                                                             FM radio tuner and dis-
                                                                             plays the FM radio screen.
                                                              Weather        Switches the source to the
                                                                             weather radio tuner and
                                                                             displays the weather radio
                                                                             screen.
                                                              Bluetooth      Switches the source to an
                                                                             external device connected
                                                                             using Bluetooth wireless
                                                                             technology, and displays
                                                                             the Bluetooth screen.
                                                              Auxiliary      Switches the source to the
                                                                             auxiliary device and dis-
                                                                             plays the auxiliary screen.
                                                              Turn Off       Turns the audio system on
                                                                             or off.
                                                              Zone Control   Displays the volume ad-
                                                                             justment screen for each
                                                                             zone.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              If multiple external devices are connected at
                                                              the same time, the audio system may not op-
                                                              erate properly. When switching from one ex-
                                                              ternal device to another one, disconnect the


                        108]]></page><page Index="121"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 109  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        currently  connected device,  and then con-  Item          Function
                        nect the other device.                               Increases the radio station
                                                                             frequency. Touch and hold
                                                                             this button to automatically
                        To change the volume:
                                                                             seek the next available ra-
                        The following slider is displayed in each            dio station.
                        screen.                               Source         Displays the media screen.
                        Use the slider control to change the volume.

                                         1                    To change the radio station frequency:
                                                              Tap “   ” or “  ” to tune to a receivable
                                                              frequency.

                        1  Slider control                     To save a radio station frequency to a preset
                                                              button:
                        TIP:                                  Tune the radio to the desired radio station,
                        The volume can also be adjusted by tapping  and then touch and hold the desired preset
                        the  “    ”  or  “  ”  button.        button for several seconds.

                                                                               1
                        Radio screen (AM/FM)
                        You can receive a radio broadcast.             AM Radio       AM-1
                                                                   1    2    3    4    5
                                                                    1710
                                  AM Radio      AM-1                           P1
                              1    2    3    4    5
                               1710
                                                                           1710 kHz
                                          P1
                                      1710 kHz
                                                                 Source           MPH    Zone Control

                                                              1  Preset button
                            Source           MPH   Zone Control

                              Item            Function
                                       Decreases the radio sta-
                                       tion frequency. Touch and
                                       hold this button to auto-
                                       matically seek the next
                                       available radio station.
                                       Decreases the radio sta-
                                       tion frequency.

                                       Increases the radio station
                                       frequency.





                                                                                             109]]></page><page Index="122"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 110  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                        Weather screen                        To connect an external device:
                        You can receive a weather broadcast.  (1) Tap the “  ” button, and then select
                                                                 “+Add Device”.
                                                              (2) Turn on the Bluetooth function of the ex-
                                   NOAA National Weather
                                                                 ternal  device, and  then search for the
                                                                 multi-function display unit of the boat.
                                   CH 1 -0.000  kHz           TIP:
                                                              Make sure that other external devices have
                             1   2   3    4   5   6   7
                                                              their Bluetooth function disabled before be-
                                                              ginning the pairing  process  to reduce  con-
                                                              nection issues.
                           Source            MPH   Zone Control

                                                              (3) Tap the “Connect” button, and the “Con-
                        To change the radio station, tap a preset but-  firm Pairing on Device”  screen is  dis-
                        ton.                                     played.
                                                              (4) Select “OK” for both the multi-function
                        Bluetooth screen                         display unit and the external device.
                        Smartphones and other external devices that
                        are compatible with Bluetooth can be con-  To disconnect an external device, turn off the
                        nected wirelessly to the audio system to lis-  Bluetooth function of the external device.
                        ten to the audio tracks stored on the devices
                        through the audio system’s speakers.  Auxiliary screen
                                                              Portable media players  and other external
                                                              devices can be connected to the audio sys-
                                 Bluetooth
                                                              tem to listen to the audio tracks stored on the
                                      Best Of You             devices through the audio system’s speak-
                                      Foo Fighters            ers.
                                      In Your Honor

                                                                             Auxiliary

                           Source            MPH   Zone Control


                              Item            Function
                                       Displays the external de-
                                       vice management screen.
                                                                 Source           MPH    Zone Control
                                       Displays information about
                                       the current audio track.






                        110]]></page><page Index="123"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 111  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                                                                   System control screen
                               1
                                                              The system control screen can be used to
                                                              turn the boat lights on and off.
                                                              When a light is turned on, it will be indicated
                                                              on the illustration of the boat shown on the
                                                              screen.






                        1  Auxiliary input jack

                        TIP:
                         You can adjust the volume level of the
                          speakers using  the multi-function  display  Courtesy
                          unit or the volume control of the external
                          device.
                                                                   Item            Function
                         To select the audio tracks, use the external
                                                              Courtesy       Turns the courtesy lights
                          device.                                            on or off. (See page 32 for
                                                                             information on the location
                        Zone control screen                                  of the courtesy lights.)
                        Perform volume adjustment for each zone.  Underwater  Turns the underwater lights
                                                                             on or off.
                                                              Docking        Turns the docking lights on
                                      Zone Control                           or off.
                                                              Tower          Turns the tower lights on or
                                      100                                    off.
                                100     100   100             Helm           Turns the illumination on or
                                                              (222SE / 222SD)  off for the panels on the
                                                                             port and starboard sides of
                                                                             the steering wheel.

                            Back    Selected Zone: Interior
                                                              To adjust the brightness of the lights:
                                                              Tap the item you want to adjust the bright-
                                                              ness for, and move the slider control left or
                        To adjust the volume:
                                                              right to adjust.
                        (1) Tap the highlighted part.
                        (2) Adjust by moving the slider control to the
                            left or right.
                        (3) Tap “Back”.
                        TIP:
                        Zones that can be set differ depending on the
                        specifications.


                                                                                             111]]></page><page Index="124"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 112  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                                                       Setting screen
                                         1
                                                              The setting screen can be used to change the
                                                              settings of the multi-function display unit.

                        1  Slider control
                                                                              Menu
                        TIP:                                           Time         Depth
                        The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-    Unit        Brightness
                        ping the “    ” or “   ” button.
                                                                      Wellness     Language
                                                                     Tuner Region  Auto Volume

                                                                                           Reset

                                                                   Item            Function
                                                              Time           Displays the time setting
                                                                             screen.
                                                              Depth          Displays the depth alarm
                                                                             setting screen.
                                                              Unit           Displays the unit setting
                                                                             screen.
                                                              Brightness     Displays the brightness
                                                                             setting screen.
                                                              Wellness       Displays the maintenance
                                                                             setting screen.
                                                              Language       Displays the language set-
                                                                             ting screen.
                                                              Tuner Region   Displays the tuner region
                                                                             setting screen.
                                                              Auto Volume    Displays the auto volume
                                                                             setting screen.
                                                              Reset          Displays the factory reset
                                                                             screen.


















                        112]]></page><page Index="125"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 113  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Time setting screen                    If the water depth is set to 0.0 m (0.0 ft), the
                        Perform settings related to the time.  depth alarm will not operate.

                                         Time                 (2) Tap “Back” to complete the setting.
                                12-Hour:   24-Hour:
                                                              Unit setting screen
                                                              The display units for the multi-function dis-
                               GMT Offset:    -4
                                                              play unit can be changed.
                             Daylight Saving Time:  Disabled
                                                                             Set Unit
                            Back
                                                                             U.S. Std

                        To set the time:                              U.S. Std       Metric
                        (1) Select a 12 hour display or 24 hour dis-
                            play.
                        (2) Tap “   ” or “  ” to adjust GMT off-  Back
                            set.
                        (3) Select to enable or disable daylight sav-
                            ing time.                         Select “U.S. Std” or “Metric”.

                        Depth alarm setting screen            Brightness setting screen
                        The water depth for the depth alarm can be  The multi-function display has a day mode
                        set.                                  and a night mode.
                                                              The brightness can be set separately for the
                                     Set Depth Alarm          day mode and for the night mode.


                                                                           Set Brightness
                                        5.0 Ft
                                                                       Night:    30  Day:    90


                            Back
                                         1

                        1  Slider control                        Back
                        To adjust the water depth setting:
                        (1) Move the slider control left or right.  To set the brightness:
                        TIP:                                  (1) Set either “Night” or “Day”.
                         The water depth can also be adjusted by  (2) Move the slider control left or right to ad-
                          tapping the “  ” or “  ” button.       just.


                                                                                             113]]></page><page Index="126"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 114  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                                              Language setting screen
                                         1                    The language for the  multi-function  display
                                                              unit can be changed.


                        1  Slider control                                  Set Language

                        TIP:
                                                                       English     Espanol
                        The brightness can also be adjusted by tap-
                        ping the “    ” or “   ” button.                     Francais

                        (3) Tap “Back”.
                                                                 Back
                        Maintenance setting screen
                        This screen displays the number of hours that
                        the engines have been running since the last  To change the language, tap the desired lan-
                        maintenance.                          guage.

                                                              Tuner Region setting screen
                                 Time Since Last Maintenance
                                                              Set the region in which the multi-function dis-
                             Port Engine          0  Hrs      play unit will be used.


                              Starboard Engine    0  Hrs
                                                                            Tuner Region

                                                                     North America  South America
                            Back                     Reset
                                                                       Japan        Taiwan
                        After maintenance is  performed, reset the
                        number of hours of operation as follows.  Back

                        To reset the number of hours of operation:
                        (1) Tap the “Reset” button.           To change the tuner region, tap the desired
                        (2) When the confirmation message ap-  region.
                            pears, tap the “YES” button to reset the
                            number of hours of operation.
                        TIP:
                        To return to the maintenance setting screen
                        without  resetting the number of hours, tap
                        the “NO” button.




                        114]]></page><page Index="127"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 115  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Auto Volume setting screen
                        Auto Volume  will automatically  control the
                        level of volume when overcoming wind or en-
                        gine noise.

                                    Auto Volume Settings

                              Auto Volume Status:  Off

                                Intensity:     1



                            Back

                        To turn on or off the auto volume, tap “Off”.
                        To control the intensity of auto volume, tap
                        the up and down arrows.
                        To return to the menu screen, tap “Back”.

                        Factory reset screen
                        This screen can be set to the factory settings.



                               Are you sure you would like to reset to
                                     factory settings?
                                  You cannot undo this action!




                           Cancel                    Conﬁrm

                        To reset to the factory setting:
                        (1) Tap “Confirm”.
                        (2) When the confirmation message ap-
                            pears, tap the “YES” button.










                                                                                             115]]></page><page Index="128"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 116  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation

                                                       Warnings
                        If a malfunction or fault occurs, a warning buzzer will sound and a warning icon and warning
                        message will be displayed on the display.
                        If the displayed warning message includes instructions, follow those instructions. If you have
                        any questions, consult a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                                                               1
                                                                                RUNNING MODE
                                    27
                                    :
                                  1 10:27 am                                    R RUNNING MODE
                                   0
                                      am
                                                     N
                                                     NEE    N N    N NWW
                           FU
                                                                                            DEPTH
                           FUELEL                                                           D D DEPTH
                           100
                           100 %                          Check Engine !                    .8 9.8 ftt ft 8 9 9 9
                           100
                           100%
                              %
                              %
                                                          SPEEDPEED
                                                          S
                                                   Consult YAMAHA dealer.
                               19 19                                                     19 19
                                       x1000 rpmm                            x1000 rpm
                                                                                 m
                                                                             x1000 rp
                                       x1000 rp
                                                                    mphh  OK
                                                                    mp
                              STAR
                              STARTT                                                    HOUSE
                                                                                         OUSE
                                                                                        H
                              13.0 0  V V  9 9                                     9 9  13.0  V V
                              13.
                                                                                        13.0
                                               Blower
                                                                             c
                                                                      Na
                                                                            n
                                                                              o
                                                                             h
                                          Bilgee
                                          Bil g  Bl o w e r           Navv  A Anchorr
                                                               2
                        1  Warning title
                        2  Message
                        Warning example
                                    Warning title                         Message
                         Check Engine                      Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Low Oil Pressure                  Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Check Battery                     Low Voltage detected.
                                                           Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         GPS Communication Failure         Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Transducer Communication Failure  Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Joystick Communication Failure    Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Stereo Remote Communication Failure  Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Surfpointe Communication Failure  Surfpointe is in deploy state. Reduce Speed.
                                                           Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         PDM Communication Failure         Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Engine Over Temperature           Consult YAMAHA Dealer.
                         Low Fuel                          Fuel level is low. Please refuel soon.
                         Low Fuel Warning                  Fuel level is less than 10%.
                         Depth Warning                     Depth alarm limit reached.
                        116]]></page><page Index="129"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 117  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Instrument operation

                        Check engine warning                  Check that water comes out of the outlets
                        If an engine sensor malfunction or a short cir-  while the engines are running, particularly
                        cuit is detected, a warning will appear on the  while applying throttle. If you do not see any
                        multi-function display and the buzzer will  water at the outlets, cooling water may not be
                        sound. If a fault is detected for the engines,  circulating in the engines.
                        “Check Engine” will be displayed. If this oc-
                        curs, reduce the  engine speed,  return to
                        shore, and have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check
                        the engine.

                        Low oil pressure warning
                        If the oil pressure does not rise to specifica-
                        tion, a warning will appear on the multi-func-
                        tion display and the buzzer will sound. If a    2
                        fault is  detected for the engines, “Low Oil  1
                        Pressure” will be displayed. At the same time,  1  Cooling water pilot outlet (starboard engine)
                        the engine speed is automatically limited to  2  Cooling water pilot outlet (port engine)
                        help prevent damage. If this occurs, reduce
                        the engine speed, return to shore or maneu-  TIP:
                        ver to a safe location, and check the engine  If the cooling water passages in the engines
                        oil level. (See page 150 for engine oil level  are dry, it will take about 20 seconds for wa-
                        checking procedures.)                 ter to reach the pilot outlets after starting.
                        If the oil level is low, add enough engine oil to
                        raise it to the proper level. If the oil level is suf-  If water is not circulating, something may be
                        ficient, have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the  clogging the intake grates. Refer to “Jet
                        engine.                               pump clean-out procedure” on page 209.

                        Over temperature warning
                        This model is equipped with an over temper-
                        ature warning system. If the engines start to
                        overheat, a warning will appear on the multi-
                        function display and the buzzer will sound. If
                        the engine  is  over heating, “Engine Over
                        Temperature” will be displayed. At the same
                                                                        1
                        time, the engine speed is automatically limit-
                        ed to help prevent damage. If this occurs, im-
                        mediately reduce the engine speed, return to
                                                              1  Intake grate
                        shore  or maneuver to a safe location,  and
                        check for water discharge at the cooling wa-
                        ter pilot outlets. There are cooling water pilot
                        outlets on the  starboard  side of the  hull.



                                                                                             117]]></page><page Index="130"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 118  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Instrument operation


                         NOTICE                               Low fuel level warning
                                                              If “Low Fuel” appears on the multi-function
                        If the  cause of overheating  cannot be  display, refill the fuel tank as soon as possi-
                        found and corrected, take special precau-  ble. (See page 147 for information on filling
                        tions to avoid major engine damage while  the fuel tank.)
                        you return to shore.
                        Single engine overheating — Shut off the  Depth warning
                        overheating engine and use the properly  If the boat enters an area that is shallower
                        running engine to return to shore. Operate  than the water depth set for the depth alarm,
                        at no-wake speed (8 km/h, 5 mph) to pre-  the depth warning will be activated and the
                        vent water from flooding the non-operat-  buzzer will sound.
                        ing engine through the water intake. See  If the warning is activated, move the boat to
                        page 95 for  information on the no-wake  an area that is deeper than the water depth
                        mode.                                 set for the depth alarm. (See page 113 for in-
                        Both  engines overheating  — If getting a  formation on setting the depth alarm.)
                        tow from another vessel is not possible,
                        operate both engines just slightly above
                        idle while you return to shore. If you can be
                        towed, refer to “Towing the boat” on page
                        220.

                        Battery voltage warning
                        If “Check Battery” appears on the multi-func-
                        tion display and the buzzer will sound, check
                        the battery connections. If the battery connec-
                        tions are clean and tight and the warning indi-
                        cation continues, have a Yamaha Boat Dealer
                        check the charging system.

                        Communication error warning
                        If a communication error is detected for the
                        GPS function, a sensor, or other device, a
                        warning will appear on the multi-function dis-
                        play and the buzzer will sound. If this occurs,
                        reduce the engine speed, return to shore, and
                        have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the boat.










                        118]]></page><page Index="131"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 119  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                       Seats                   ator or striking a passenger,  which
                                                               could result in an accident.
                             WARNING
                                                              These cushions can also be used to create a
                        Passengers must always sit in a designat-
                                                              temporary center seat.
                        ed  seating area, place feet on  the  deck,
                        and hold on to the handgrips, handrails, or
                        straps when the boat is in motion.

                        This  boat  is equipped with the following
                        seats.

                         12    3                   4 5 1                                  1





                                                              1  Bow filler cushion
                                                   6

                                                               12     1   3         41 5      1

                        1  Handrail
                        2  Front port seat (rear)
                        3  Front port seat (front)
                        4  Front starboard seat (front)
                        5  Front starboard seat (rear)
                        6  Bow filler cushion

                        Two bow filler cushions are provided for use
                        while the boat is not being operated.  1  Handgrip
                                                              2  Rear starboard seat
                        These cushions can be used to make a large
                                                              3  Starboard engine hood seat
                        flat area in the bow for use as a sundeck.
                                                              4  Port engine hood seat
                        To remove or install the bow filler cushions,
                                                              5  Rear port seat
                        lift up the front seats (rear).
                             WARNING                          Driver’s seat
                                                              The driver’s seat can slide forward and rear-
                         Do not use the bow filler cushions while
                                                              ward, and the seat can swivel, and the back-
                          the boat is underway.  A passenger
                                                              rest angle can be adjusted. In addition, the
                          could lose balance and fall on the deck
                                                              seat bolster at the front of the seat can be
                          or overboard, causing injury or death.
                                                              flipped up to change the seat style for a
                         Stow the cushions securely before oper-
                                                              raised seating position.
                          ating the boat. A loose cushion could be
                                                              Make sure that the seat is securely locked in
                          blown by the wind, distracting the oper-
                                                              place before getting underway.
                                                                                             119]]></page><page Index="132"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 120  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        To slide the seat:
                        Lift up the slide lock lever, move the seat to
                        the desired position, and then release the le-
                        ver.




                                                                     1



                             1                                1  Seat bolster

                                                              Passenger’s seat
                                                              (except for AR220 / SX220)
                        1  Slide lock lever                   The passenger’s seat can be adjusted in the
                                                              same ways as the driver’s seat.
                        To swivel the seat:                   See “Driver’s seat” for instructions on adjust-
                        Lift up the swivel lock lever, move the seat to  ing the seat. However, the seat bolster of the
                        the desired position, and then release the le-  passenger’s seat cannot be adjusted.
                        ver. If it is too easy or too difficult to rotate the
                        seat, adjust the swivel friction by turning the
                        swivel friction knob in or out.
                                                                              1






                                                       2
                                 1
                                                              1  Passenger’s seat
                                                              Swim platform seat
                        1  Swivel lock lever                  (except for AR220 / SX220)
                        2  Swivel friction knob               The swim platform seats are provided on the
                                                              swim platform. WARNING! Do not sit on the
                        To flip up the seat bolster:          swim platform seats while the engines are
                        Lift up the seat bolster at the front of the seat  running. Exhaust gases coming from un-
                        so that it is resting against the backrest.  derneath the swim platform contain car-
                                                              bon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas
                                                              which may cause brain damage or death
                                                              when inhaled.


                        120]]></page><page Index="133"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 121  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                                              To install an underwater seat/table, fit the
                                        1                     seat pole into the seat bracket, and then se-
                                                              cure the pole by inserting the lock pin.








                                                                                          2

                        1  Swim platform seat
                                                                    1       3
                        Underwater seats/tables
                        The underwater seats/tables can be used to  1  Seat bracket
                        sit in the water while the boat is moored or  2  Seat pole
                        anchored.                             3  Lock pin
                        Remove the seats  before starting the en-
                        gines,  and install  the seats only  when the  TIP:
                        boat is stopped and the engines are not run-   The underwater seats/tables can also be
                        ning.                                  installed upside down to use as table.
                                                               The underwater seats/tables will float if ac-
                             WARNING
                                                               cidentally dropped into the water.
                        Do not sit on the underwater seats/tables
                        while the engines are  running. Exhaust
                        gases coming from underneath the swim
                        platform contain carbon monoxide, a col-
                        orless, odorless gas  which may cause
                        brain damage or death when inhaled.












                                              1


                        1  Underwater seat/table




                                                                                             121]]></page><page Index="134"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 122  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Equipment operation

                                   Engine hood                    Storage compartments
                        The engine hood can be opened to access  This boat is equipped with the following con-
                        the engines.                          venient on-board storage compartments.
                        The engine hood latch is located under the  Make sure  that the storage  compartments
                        front of each engine hood seat.       are securely closed before getting underway.
                        To prevent excess water from spilling onto
                        the engines after a rainfall or washing down  Anchor storage compartment
                        the boat, wipe off the seat cushions before  The anchor storage compartment is located
                        opening the engine hood.              at the bow.
                        To open the engine hood, pull the engine  To open the anchor storage compartment:
                        hood latch up and lift the engine hood.  Pull the anchor storage compartment lid latch
                                                              to open the lid.
                                           1
                                                                                   1






                                                                                     2

                                 2

                        1  Engine hood
                        2  Engine hood latch                  1  Anchor storage compartment lid
                                                              2  Anchor storage compartment lid latch
                        To close the engine hood, push the front of
                        each engine hood seat down to securely lock
                        it in place.

                                                                                    1









                                                              1  Anchor storage compartment
                                                              When storing the anchor, place some cush-
                                                              ioning material or the anchor line under the
                                                              anchor.




                        122]]></page><page Index="135"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 123  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        To close the anchor storage compartment:  Ski locker
                        Close the  anchor  storage compartment lid,  The ski locker is located under the floor.
                        and then push it to securely lock it in place.  To open the ski locker:
                                                              (1) Pull the lock handle up.
                        Front underseat storage               (2) Turn the lock handle clockwise, and then
                        compartments                             open the ski locker lid.
                        The front underseat storage compartment
                        (starboard) and front underseat storage com-  1
                        partment (port) are located  under  the front
                        starboard seat and front port seat respective-
                        ly.
                        To open a front underseat storage compart-
                        ment, lift the front seat (rear) up.
                                                                                         2

                                                      1
                                                              1  Lock handle
                                                              2  Ski locker lid







                        1  Front starboard seat (rear)


                                                                                        1




                                                              1  Ski locker
                                                    1
                                                              To close the ski locker:
                                                              (1) Close the ski locker lid.
                                                              (2) Turn the  lock handle  counterclockwise
                                                                 and make  sure that  the lid is securely
                                                                 closed.
                        1  Front underseat storage compartment
                                                              (3) Push the lock handle down.
                        To close a front underseat storage compart-
                        ment, lower the front seat (rear).





                                                                                             123]]></page><page Index="136"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 124  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        Rear underseat storage compartment    To open the rear underseat storage compart-
                        (starboard)                           ment (port), lift the rear port seat up.
                        The rear underseat storage compartment
                        (starboard)  is located  under the rear star-
                        board seat.
                        To open the rear underseat storage compart-
                        ment (starboard), lift the rear starboard seat              1
                        up.





                                                  1           1  Rear port seat








                        1  Rear starboard seat
                                                                                1






                                                              1  Rear underseat storage compartment (port)

                                                              To close the rear underseat storage compart-
                                                 1
                                                              ment (port), lower the rear starboard seat.
                                                              Enclosed head compartment
                        1  Rear underseat storage compartment (star-  The enclosed storage compartment is a large
                           board)                             storage compartment that is located on the
                                                              port side.
                        To close the rear underseat storage compart-  To open the enclosed storage compartment:
                        ment (starboard), lower the rear starboard  Pull the enclosed storage compartment door
                        seat.                                 latch to open the door.

                        Rear underseat storage compartment
                        (port)
                        The rear underseat storage compartment
                        (port) is located under the rear port seat.



                        124]]></page><page Index="137"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 125  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation


                          1









                                                2                    1
                                                                                   2
                        1  Enclosed storage compartment door latch  1  Driver’s side console compartment door
                        2  Enclosed head compartment door     2  Driver’s side console compartment door latch














                                             1                                           1
                        1  Enclosed head compartment          1  Driver’s side console compartment

                        To close the enclosed head compartment:  To close the driver’s side console compart-
                        Close  the enclosed storage compartment  ment, close the  driver’s side console com-
                        door, and then push it to securely lock it in  partment  door, and then hook the latch to
                        place.                                securely lock it in place.
                        Driver’s side console compartment
                        The driver’s side console compartment is lo-
                        cated in front of the helm.
                        The driver’s side console compartment door
                        can be used as a partition in the front walk-
                        through.
                        To open the driver’s side console compart-
                        ment, unhook the driver’s side console com-
                        partment door latch.





                                                                                             125]]></page><page Index="138"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 126  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        To  use the driver’s side console compart-  Stowable table
                        ment door as the partition:           (except for AR220 / SX220)
                        (1) Unfold the door and guide the edge of it  The stowable table is located in front of the
                            into the channel on  the enclosed head  passenger’s seat.
                            compartment.                      To use the stowable table, pull the table and
                                                              lower it until it contacts the stoppers.


                                                      1
                                                                                            1
                                              2





                        1  Edge
                        2  Channel                            1  Stowable table
                        (2) To hold the door in place, hook the driv-
                            er’s side console compartment door
                            latch to the metal tab on the front side of
                            the door.
                                                                                            1



                                                       2


                                                              1  Stowable table

                              1                                 Maximum weight limit:
                                                                  9 kg (20 lb)
                        1  Driver’s side console compartment door latch
                        2  Metal tab                          To stow the stowable table, lift the table and
                                                              place it in its original position.











                        126]]></page><page Index="139"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 127  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        Glove compartment (AR220 / SX220)     Glove compartment
                        The glove compartment is located on the port  (except for AR220 / SX220)
                        console.                              The glove compartment is located in front of
                        To access the glove compartment, open the  the passenger’s seat.
                        glove compartment lid.                To open the glove compartment:
                                                              While pulling the glove compartment latch,
                                                              pull the glove compartment lid to open it.

                                                                                              2



                                                                       1
                                                   1


                        1  Glove compartment lid

                                                              1  Glove compartment lid
                                                              2  Glove compartment latch







                                                   1                                          1



                        1  Glove compartment


                                                              1  Glove compartment

                                                              To close the glove compartment:
                                                              Close the glove compartment lid,  and then
                                                              push it to securely lock it in place.











                                                                                             127]]></page><page Index="140"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 128  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        Wet storage compartment               TIP:
                        The wet storage compartment is located un-   The engines will not start if the rear plat-
                        der the swim platform.                 form hatch is not securely closed.
                        To open the wet storage compartment:   Except for AR220 / SX220: Snap the but-
                        (1) Pull the lock handles up.          tons on the bottom of each swim platform
                        TIP:                                   seat onto the button bases.
                        Except for AR220 / SX220: The lock handles
                        are located under the swim platform seats.  Stern storage compartments
                        (2) Turn  the lock handles  clockwise, and  The stern storage compartments are located
                            then open the rear platform hatch.  behind the swim platform seat backrests.
                                                              To open a stern storage compartment, pull
                                                              the strap on the swim platform seat backrest.
                                                         2
                                                                                         1







                          1
                        1  Rear platform hatch
                        2  Lock handle
                                                              1  Swim platform seat backrest
                                                     1


                                                                                            1









                        1  Wet storage compartment
                                                              1  Stern storage compartment (port)
                        To close the wet storage compartment:
                        (1) Close the rear platform hatch.    To close  the stern storage compartment,
                        (2) Turn the lock handles counterclockwise  place the backrest in its original position and
                            and make sure that the hatch is securely  push it to securely lock it in place.
                            closed.
                        (3) Push the lock handles down.


                        128]]></page><page Index="141"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 129  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                  Walk-through                           Windshield
                        Front walk-through                    The windshield can be opened and closed.
                        This boat has a large bow  area where two
                                                                  WARNING
                        adults can sit comfortably with their legs out-
                        stretched. The front walk-through provides  To avoid injury, the windshield must be se-
                        easy access to the bow area from the cabin  cured when the boat is in motion.
                        area.
                                                              To close the windshield:
                                                              (1) Unsnap the  retaining strap from  the
                                                                 windshield, and then snap it onto  the
                                                                 strap base.






                                       1                                                 2
                                                                                    1
                        1  Front walk-through
                        Rear walk-through
                        The rear walk-through has a flat design so
                                                              1  Retaining strap
                        that persons can easily board the boat from
                                                              2  Strap base
                        the stern area and access the stern area from
                        the cabin area.                       (2) Close the windshield, and then turn the
                                                                 windshield latches to the lock position.
                                          1




                                                                    1






                        1  Rear walk-through
                                                              1  Windshield latch

                                                              To open the windshield:
                                                              (1) Turn the windshield latches to the unlock
                                                                 position, and then open the windshield.



                                                                                             129]]></page><page Index="142"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 130  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        (2) Unsnap the retaining strap from the strap   Anchor light
                            base, and  then snap it onto the wind-   (except for SX220)
                            shield.
                                                              The anchor light is located at the top center of
                                                              the wakeboard tower. It is also the “all-
                                                              around” light for navigation at night or in low-
                                                              visibility conditions. (See page 111 for infor-
                                                              mation on the anchor light on.)
                                                              To use the anchor light:
                                                              Pull the lock tab, raise the anchor light, and
                                                              then move the lock tab to its original position
                                                              to lock the anchor light in place.









                                                                                      1




                                                              1  Lock tab


                                                                              1












                                                              1  Anchor light

                                                              To store the anchor light:
                                                              Pull the lock tab, lower the anchor light, and
                                                              then move the lock tab to its original position
                                                              to lock the anchor light in place.





                        130]]></page><page Index="143"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 131  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                              Anchor light (SX220)            (3) Slide anchor light stopper A apart to dis-
                        The boat is equipped with a removable an-  connect.
                        chor light. It is also the “all-around” light for
                        navigation at night or in low-visibility condi-
                        tions. (See page 84 for information on the an-       2
                        chor light on.)
                        The anchor light is stored in the ski locker.
                        To set up the anchor light:
                        (1) Open the ski locker. (See page 123.)

                                                                                     1

                                                              1  Anchor light stopper A
                                                              2  Anchor light stopper B

                                                              (4) Extend the anchor light pole, and then fit
                                                   1             anchor light stopper A onto the center
                                                                 section of the pole.


                        1  Ski locker
                        (2) Remove the anchor light from the anchor
                            light holder.
                                                                                 1
                                                       1


                                                         2
                                                              1  Anchor light stopper A






                        1  Anchor light
                        2  Anchor light holder











                                                                                             131]]></page><page Index="144"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 132  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        (5) Open the cap of the anchor light socket,  (3) Connect the anchor light stopper A by fit-
                            fit the protrusion on the anchor light into  ting the protrusion on it into the slot.
                            the slot in the socket, and then install the
                            light into the socket.





                                                       3
                          1
                                                                                     1

                                                              1  Anchor light stopper A
                                                         2
                        1  Cap                                (4) Install the  anchor light into  the anchor
                        2  Slot                                  light holder, and then close the ski lock-
                        3  Protrusion                            er.
                        (6) Screw anchor light stopper B into the an-
                            chor light socket.


                                  1











                        1  Anchor light stopper B
                        To store the anchor light:
                        (1) Unscrew anchor light stopper B upward,
                            remove the anchor light, and then close
                            the cap of the anchor light socket.
                        (2) Pull anchor light stopper A from the cen-
                            ter section of the anchor light pole, and
                            then fold the pole.






                        132]]></page><page Index="145"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 133  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                   Bow ladder                 To stow the bow ladder:
                        The bow ladder is located in the anchor stor-  (1) Open the anchor storage compartment
                        age compartment.                         lid.
                                                              (2) Raise the bow  ladder, and then  pull it
                                              1                  rearward completely.
                                                  2           (3) Hook the bow ladder strap onto the bow
                                                                 ladder.
                                                              (4) Fold the bow ladder, and then store it in
                                                     3
                                4                                the anchor storage compartment.
                                                              (5) Snap the retaining strap onto the strap
                                                                 base to secure the bow ladder.
                                                              (6) Close the anchor storage compartment
                                                                 lid.

                        1  Bow ladder
                        2  Retaining strap
                        3  Anchor storage compartment
                        4  Bow ladder strap
                        To use the bow ladder:
                        (1) Open the anchor storage compartment
                            lid. (See page 122.)
                        (2) Unsnap the retaining strap from the an-
                            chor storage compartment.
                        (3) Unhook the bow ladder strap.
                        (4) Extend the bow ladder out completely,
                            and then lower it.
                        (5) Close the anchor storage compartment
                            lid to use it as a step.






                                                      1







                        1  Bow ladder





                                                                                             133]]></page><page Index="146"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 134  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Equipment operation

                                  Swim platform

                             WARNING
                        Stay away from the swim  platform  area
                        while the engines are  running. Exhaust
                        gases coming from underneath it contain
                        carbon monoxide, a  colorless, odorless
                        gas which may cause brain  damage or                        1
                        death when inhaled. Symptoms  include
                        nausea, dizziness, and drowsiness.
                        The swim platform area provides a place to  1  Stern ladder
                        stand or sit while putting on skis or a wake-
                                                              (2) Pull the stern ladder out completely, and
                        board, and includes a stern ladder to make
                                                                 then lower it.
                        boarding from the water easier.

                                                       1










                                                              To stow the stern ladder:
                        1  Swim platform
                                                              (1) Raise the stern ladder until it is horizon-
                        Stern ladder                             tal, and then push it forward completely.
                        The stern ladder is stored under  the swim  (2) Push the end of the stern ladder to fit it
                        platform.                                onto the hooks on the boat.
                        To use the stern ladder:
                        (1) Lift the end of the stern ladder to release
                            it from the hooks on the boat.







                                                                             1

                                                              1  Hook



                        134]]></page><page Index="147"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 135  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        Remote control keypad                             Side table
                        (except for AR220 / SX220)
                                                                  WARNING
                        The remote control keypad is located on the
                        starboard side of the swim platform.  If the side table is installed at the swim
                        For operating instructions, refer to the stereo  platform, do not use the table while the en-
                        system owner’s manual included with your  gines are running. Exhaust gases coming
                        boat.                                 from underneath the swim platform con-
                                                              tain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odor-
                                                       1      less gas which may cause brain damage
                                                              or death when inhaled. Symptoms include
                                                              nausea, dizziness, and drowsiness.

                                                              NOTICE
                                                              If the side table is installed at the swim
                                                              platform, remove the side table before op-
                                                              erating the boat. Otherwise, the side table
                                                              may fall into the water.
                        1  Remote control keypad
                                                              The side table can be installed to the rear-
                        Accessory outlet                      ward of the passenger’s seat.
                        The 12 V DC outlet is shown in the following
                        illustration.
                                                                               1
                         NOTICE
                        Do not use an automotive cigarette lighter
                        or other accessories that get hot because
                        the outlet can be damaged.


                                                     1

                                                              1  Side table
                                                    12V
                                                              Except for AR220 / SX220: This model can
                                                              also be installed at the swim platform.





                        1  12 V DC outlet






                                                                                             135]]></page><page Index="148"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 136  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Equipment operation

                                                                       USB chargers
                                                              There are the USB chargers on the deck. The
                                                              USB charger can be used to charge external
                           1
                                                              devices.
                                                              AR220 / SX220
                                                                          1





                        1  Side table

                        To install the side table, slide the end of the
                        table pole into  the table bracket until it is
                        locked in place.
                                                              1  USB charger

                                                              222S
                                                                                  1




                          3
                                                  2
                                        1

                        1  Table bracket
                        2  Table pole
                        3  Table bracket knob
                                                              1  USB charger
                        To remove the side table, pull the table brack-
                        et knob, and then pull the table pole upward.  222SE / 222SD
                                                                      1












                                                              1  USB charger


                        136]]></page><page Index="149"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 137  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                Wireless charger              Except for AR220 / SX220
                        This boat is equipped with the wireless char-                 1
                        gers.
                        A smartphone that supports wireless charg-
                        ing will be charged when placed on the wire-
                        less charger.
                        AR220 / SX220


                                           1

                                                              1  Wireless charger


                                                                           1



                        1 Wireless charger


                                     1



                                                              1  Wireless charger







                        1  Wireless charger



















                                                                                             137]]></page><page Index="150"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 138  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Equipment operation

                                Wakeboard tower               NOTICE
                                (except for SX220)
                                                              Do not modify the wakeboard tower to tow
                        The wakeboard tower is provided as an ele-
                                                              from it or to carry accessories not de-
                        vated tow point suitable for wakeboards and
                                                              signed for it. The wakeboard tower could
                        similar towable recreational equipment. The
                                                              be damaged. Also, the wakeboard tower
                        tow pylon can be used to attach a standard
                                                              collapsing feature is intended for storage
                        ski rope or other tow-rope.
                                                              only. The boat should not be transported
                                                              or  operated with  the tower in  the col-
                                                              lapsed position.
                                                              Collapsing and setting up the
                                                              wakeboard tower
                                                              When  storing the boat,  collapse the  wake-
                                                              board tower.
                                                              NOTICE
                                                               Accidentally  dropping the wakeboard
                                                               tower while collapsing or raising it can
                             WARNING                           damage the tower, the boat, or both. An
                                                               assistant needs to help hold the wake-
                        Severe injury or death can result if you ig-
                                                               board tower in place during the proce-
                        nore any of the following:
                                                               dure.
                         Maximum towing capacity:
                                                               Do not operate the boat or transport it
                          1 Person, 158 kg (350 lb) max.
                                                               on the trailer with the tower in the col-
                         Make sure the tow-rope is securely fas-
                                                               lapsed position to avoid possible dam-
                          tened to  the  tow  pylon on the wake-
                                                               age.
                          board tower.
                         Do  not  tow a tube or other inflatable
                          from the wakeboard tower. Use the ski
                          tow hook on the transom.
                         Stay clear of the tow-rope while pulling
                          a wakeboard rider or skier.
                         Do not climb, hang, or sit on the wake-
                          board tower.
                         Make sure all knobs or pins securing the
                          wakeboard tower are tightened  before
                          operation and check periodically during
                          use.






                        138]]></page><page Index="151"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 139  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        To collapse the wakeboard tower:       Bimini top (except for SX220)
                        (1) While an assistant supports the wake-  Setting up the bimini top
                            board tower, completely loosen the lock  To set up the bimini top:
                            knobs on both sides of the wakeboard  (1) Remove the storage cover, and then un-
                            tower.                               wrap the bimini top.

                                               1                          1
                                                      2











                        1  Wakeboard tower                    1  Storage cover
                        2  Lock knob
                                                              (2) Pull the front of the bimini top toward the
                        (2) Lower the wakeboard tower until it   bow, and then open the flap and pull out
                            stops.                               the front support poles from the bimini
                                                                 top.

                                                                                  1








                                                                                     2

                        To set up the wakeboard tower:        1  Front support pole
                        (1) Lift the wakeboard tower.         2  Flap
                        (2) While an assistant supports the wake-
                            board tower, tighten the lock knobs on
                            both sides of the wakeboard tower until
                            they stop.








                                                                                             139]]></page><page Index="152"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 140  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        (3) Insert the front support poles  into the  (5) Push the snap button and extend each
                            mounting holes in the wakeboard tower.  rear support pole to the long position.

                                                2
                                                                    1
                                                                    2

                                                                    3
                           1
                                                                    4
                                                                    5



                        1  Mounting hole                      1  Rear support pole
                        2  Front support pole                 2  Snap button
                                                              3  Short position
                        (4) Pull the rear of the bimini top toward the  4  Middle position
                            stern, and then unhook the rear support  5  Long position
                            poles from the main pole.
                                                              (6) Secure each rear support pole to the rear
                                                                 support pole mounting bracket using the
                                                                 lock pin.
                                              2                                         1



                                                                            2         3

                                        1

                        1  Rear support pole
                        2  Main pole

                                                              1  Rear support pole
                                                              2  Lock pin
                                                              3  Rear support pole mounting bracket













                        140]]></page><page Index="153"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 141  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        (7) While pulling the main pole down, push  Storing the bimini top
                            the snap button and shorten each rear  To store the bimini top:
                            support pole to either the middle position  (1) While pulling the main pole down slightly,
                            for cruising or to the short position if you  push the snap button, and then extend
                            are using the wakeboard tower. Be sure  each rear support pole to the long posi-
                            the snap buttons click into place.   tion to loosen the bimini top.


                             1                                        1

                             2
                                                                      2
                             3
                             4                                        3




                        1  Rear support pole                  1  Rear support pole
                        2  Short position                     2  Snap button
                        3  Middle position                    3  Long position
                        4  Snap button
                                                              (2) Remove each rear support pole from the
                         NOTICE                                  rear support pole mounting bracket by
                                                                 rotating the lock pin.
                         Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) with the
                          bimini top in the up position.                                1
                         Be careful not to push the snap button
                          and extend the pole too far. Otherwise,
                          the lower section of the pole could fall          2         3
                          into the water.






                                                              1  Rear support pole
                                                              2  Lock pin
                                                              3  Rear support pole mounting bracket










                                                                                             141]]></page><page Index="154"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 142  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        (3) Push the snap button and shorten each  (5) Remove the front support poles from the
                            rear support pole to the short position.  wakeboard tower, and  then  place the
                                                                 poles in the flap of the bimini top.

                                1
                                                                                     1

                                2

                                3




                        1  Rear support pole
                        2  Short position                     1  Front support pole
                        3  Snap button
                                                              (6) Pull the front of the bimini top toward the
                         NOTICE                                  stern, wrap the bimini top around the
                                                                 main pole, and then install the storage
                        Be careful not to push the snap button and
                                                                 cover.
                        extend the pole too far.  Otherwise, the
                        lower section of the pole could fall into the
                                                              Trailering with the bimini top
                        water.
                                                              The bimini top must be secured to the boat
                        (4) Hook the rear  support  poles onto the  when it is being trailered. When the boat is
                            main pole, and then pull the rear of the  trailered with a genuine Yamaha boat cover,
                            bimini top toward the bow.        simply store the bimini top in the fully col-
                                                              lapsed position and install the storage cover.
                                                              If a boat cover is not used, wrap an elastic
                                                              cord around the top and secure the ends to
                                                              the tow pylon on the wakeboard tower to re-
                                              2
                                                              strict movement.
                           1
                                                              Removing the bimini top
                                                              To remove the bimini top:
                                                              (1) Store the bimini top. See “Storing the bi-
                                                                 mini top”.
                                                              (2) While supporting the bimini top, rotate
                        1  Rear support pole
                                                                 the lock pins securing the main pole to
                        2  Main pole
                                                                 the wakeboard tower, and then remove
                                                                 the top.





                        142]]></page><page Index="155"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 143  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                                                                     Bimini top (SX220)
                                    1                         Setting up the bimini top
                                                              To set up the bimini top:
                                                              (1) Raise the  bimini top,  and then unhook
                                                                 the rear  support poles from the main
                                                                 pole.


                            2


                        1  Bimini top
                        2  Lock pin                                              1

                        Installing the bimini top
                        To install the bimini top:
                        When installing the bimini top, simply reverse
                        the removal steps, and then make sure that
                                                              1  Rear support pole
                        the lock pins are securely installed.
                                                              (2) Secure each rear support pole to the rear
                                                                 support pole mounting bracket using the
                                                                 lock pin. Make sure that the tab on the
                                                                 end of the lock pin is pointing downward.



                                                                 1




                                                                     2

                                                                                  3

                                                              1  Rear support pole
                                                              2  Rear support pole mounting bracket
                                                              3  Lock pin











                                                                                             143]]></page><page Index="156"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 144  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        (3) Remove the storage cover, unfold the bi-
                            mini top, and pull it toward the bow.



                                      1









                                                              NOTICE
                        1  Storage cover
                                                              Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) with the
                        (4) Hook the latch on each front strap onto  bimini top in the up position.
                            the strap eye.
                                                              Storing the bimini top in the upright
                                                              position
                                  1
                                                              NOTICE
                                                              Do not trailer the boat with the bimini top
                               2                              in the fully extended or upright position.
                                                              When transporting the boat, put the bimini
                              3                               top in the fully collapsed position to avoid
                                                              damage.

                        1  Front strap
                        2  Latch
                        3  Strap eye
                        (5) Tighten the front straps so that the top is
                            snug and wrinkle free.
















                        144]]></page><page Index="157"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 145  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                 Equipment operation

                        To store the bimini top in the upright position:  poles to the rear support pole mounting
                        (1) Loosen each front strap, and then un-  brackets, and then hook each rear sup-
                            hook the latch from the strap eye.   port pole onto the main pole.


                                   1




                                                                                          1
                                2
                              3

                        1  Front strap                        1  Rear support pole
                        2  Latch
                        3  Strap eye                          (3) Install  the protective cushions around
                                                                 the poles, and then lower the bimini top
                        (2) Pull the bimini top toward the stern, and  onto the rear deck.
                            then fold it.


                                                        1                     2


                                                                     1






                                                              1  Protective cushion
                        1  Bimini top                         2  Bimini top

                        (3) Install the storage cover.        Trailering with the bimini top
                                                              The bimini top must be secured to the boat
                        Storing the bimini top in the fully   when it is being trailered. When the boat is
                        collapsed position                    trailered with a genuine Yamaha boat cover,
                        To store the bimini top in the fully collapsed  simply store the bimini top in the fully col-
                        position:                             lapsed position and install the storage cover.
                        (1) Follow the above steps for “Storing the  If a boat cover is not used, wrap an elastic
                            bimini top in the upright position”.  cord around the top and secure the ends to
                        (2) While supporting the bimini top, remove  the ski tow hook to restrict movement.
                            the lock pins securing the rear support


                                                                                             145]]></page><page Index="158"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 146  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Equipment operation

                        Removing the bimini top
                        To remove the bimini top:
                        (1) Store the bimini top. See “Storing the bi-
                            mini top in the fully collapsed position”.
                        (2) Remove the lock pins securing the bimini
                            top to the main pole mounting brackets.


                                             1











                        1  Lock pin
                        (3) Remove the bimini top from the boat.


                        Installing the bimini top
                        To install the bimini top:
                        When installing the bimini top, simply reverse
                        the removal steps, and then make sure that
                        the lock pins are securely installed.


























                        146]]></page><page Index="159"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 147  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                         Operation and handling requirements

                                Fuel requirement              ethanol content does not exceed 10% and
                        Fuel                                  the fuel meets minimum octane ratings. E-85
                                                              is a fuel blend containing 85% ethanol and
                             WARNING
                                                              therefore must not be used in this boat. All
                         Gasoline and  gasoline vapors are ex-  ethanol blends containing more than  10%
                          tremely flammable. To avoid  fires  and  ethanol can cause fuel system damage or en-
                          explosions and to reduce the risk of in-  gine performance problems.
                          jury when refueling, follow these in-  Yamaha does not recommend gasohol con-
                          structions.                         taining methanol because it can cause fuel
                         Gasoline is poisonous and can cause in-  system damage  and engine performance
                          jury or death. Handle gasoline with care.  problems.
                          Never siphon gasoline by mouth. If you  To fill the fuel tank:
                          should swallow some gasoline, inhale a  (1) Before refueling, turn off  the  engines.
                          lot of gasoline vapor, or get some gaso-  Never refuel while smoking, or while in
                          line in your eyes, see your doctor imme-  the vicinity of sparks, open  flames, or
                          diately. If gasoline spills on  your skin,  other sources of ignition.
                          wash with soap and water. If gasoline  (2) Refuel the boat in a well-ventilated area.
                          spills  on your clothing, change  your  If the boat is in the water, be sure it is se-
                          clothes.                               curely  moored to the  fueling dock. All
                                                                 passengers must be out of the boat dur-
                         NOTICE                                  ing refueling.
                                                              (3) Press the fuel tank filler cap button, and
                         Do  not  use leaded gasoline. Leaded
                                                                 then open the fuel tank filler cap.
                          gasoline can seriously damage the en-
                          gines.
                         Avoid getting water and contaminants in
                          the  fuel  tank. Contaminated fuel can
                          cause poor performance  and engine
                          damage. Use only fresh  gasoline that
                          has been stored in clean containers.
                                                                1
                          Recommended fuel:
                            Regular unleaded gasoline with a
                                                                2
                            minimum octane rating of 86
                            (Pump octane number) = (R + M)/2  1  Fuel tank filler cap
                            90 (Research octane number)       2  Fuel tank filler cap button
                                                              (4) Slowly add fuel to the fuel tank.
                        Gasohol
                                                                Fuel tank capacity:
                        There are two types of gasohol: gasohol con-
                                                                  284 L (75.0 US gal, 62.5 Imp.gal)
                        taining ethanol and that containing methanol.
                        Gasohol containing ethanol  can be  used if


                                                                                             147]]></page><page Index="160"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 148  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                        (5) Stop filling when the fuel just becomes  Engine oil requirement
                            visible in the bottom of the filler tube. Do  Engine oil
                            not “top off” the tank, because gasoline  NOTICE
                            could spill out.
                        (6) Wipe up any spilled fuel immediately.  Use only 4-stroke engine oil. Usage of 2-
                        (7) Close the fuel tank filler cap by pushing it  stroke engine oil could result in severe en-
                            until it locks in place. Make sure that the  gine damage.
                            fuel tank filler cap is securely closed.
                                                              Select an oil grade according to the average
                        Engine Med RX Fuel Additive
                        As the fuel mixture burns in your engine’s  temperatures in the area where the boat will
                                                              be used.
                        combustion chambers, carbon deposits are
                        left behind. Over time, these deposits can re-  Recommended engine oil:
                        duce performance  and even  cause engine  YAMALUBE 4W
                        damage. Marine engines tend to run at lower  Recommended engine oil type:
                        operating temperatures than other engines,  SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, 20W-40, 20W-
                        making them more likely to accumulate these  50
                        harmful deposits. Engine Med RX, available  Recommended engine oil grade
                        from your Yamaha Boat Dealer, is formulated  (3-star models):
                        to remove existing deposits and, when used  API SG or higher
                        continuously, prevent new ones from form-  Recommended engine oil grade
                        ing, while also helping to keep fuel injectors  (4-star models):
                        and other fuel system components clean for  API SJ or higher
                        proper performance and longer engine life.
                                                              3-star models




























                        148]]></page><page Index="161"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 149  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                         Operation and handling requirements

                        4-star models                         Checking the engine oil level
                                                              (AR220 / SX220)
                                                                  WARNING
                                                              Engine oil is extremely hot immediately af-
                                                              ter the engines are turned off. Coming in
                                                              contact with or getting any engine oil on
                                                              your clothes could result in burns.

                                                              NOTICE
                                                               Do not run the engine with too much or
                        TIP:                                   not enough oil in the oil tank, otherwise
                        When the engine is operated at high speeds,  the engine could be damaged.
                        some engine oil may be consumed. Be sure   Make sure that debris and water do not
                        to check the engine oil level.         enter the oil tank filler hole. Debris and
                                                               water in the engine oil can cause serious
                        Why Yamalube                           engine damage.
                        YAMALUBE oil is a Genuine YAMAHA Part
                                                              TIP:
                        born of the engineers’ passion and belief that
                                                               When checking the engine oil level on land,
                        engine oil is an important liquid engine com-
                                                               the engine must be running while water is
                        ponent. We form teams of specialists in the
                                                               being supplied to the cooling water pas-
                        fields of mechanical engineering, chemistry,
                                                               sages. (See “Flushing the cooling system”
                        electronics and track testing, and have them
                                                               on page 187 for information on supplying
                        develop the engine together with the oil it will
                                                               water.)
                        use. Yamalube oils take full advantage of the
                                                               When checking the engine oil level on wa-
                        base oil’s qualities and blend in the ideal bal-
                                                               ter, moor the boat so that it will not drift
                        ance of additives to make sure the final oil
                                                               away.
                        clears our performance standards. Thus,
                        Yamalube mineral, semisynthetic and syn-
                                                              To check the engine oil level:
                        thetic oils have their own distinct characters
                                                              (1) With the engine stopped, place the boat
                        and value. Yamaha’s experience gained over
                                                                 in a precisely level position on land or
                        many years of research  and development
                                                                 launch the boat.
                        into oil since the  1960’s helps make
                                                              (2) Look in all directions, and then start the
                        Yamalube the best choice for your Yamaha
                                                                 engine. (See page 169 for information on
                        engine.
                                                                 starting the engine.)
                                                              (3) Run the engine at idling speed for 6 min-
                                                                 utes or more. Run the engine an addi-
                                                                 tional 5 minutes if  the  ambient
                                                                 temperature is 20 °C (68 °F) or less.
                                                              (4) Stop the engine.
                                                              (5) Open the engine hood. (See page 122.)
                                                                                             149]]></page><page Index="162"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 150  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                        (6) Loosen the oil tank filler cap and remove  (10) Securely install the oil tank filler cap and
                            it, and then wipe  the attached dipstick  turn it until it stops.
                            clean.                            (11) Repeat the checking oil level procedure
                                                                 for the other engine.
                                               1              (12) Close the engine hood.

                                                              Checking the engine oil
                                                              (except for AR220 / SX220)
                                                                  WARNING
                                                              Engine oil is extremely hot immediately af-
                                                              ter the engines are turned off. Coming in
                                                              contact with or getting any engine oil on
                                                              your clothes could result in burns.
                        1  Oil tank filler cap/Dipstick
                                                              NOTICE
                        (7) Screw the oil tank filler cap into the filler
                            hole until it stops. Remove the oil tank  Make sure debris and water do not enter
                            filler cap again and make sure that the  the oil filler hole. Debris and water in the
                            engine oil level is between the minimum  engine oil can cause serious engine dam-
                            and maximum level marks.          age.
                                                              To check the engine oil level:
                                                              (1) Place the boat in a precisely level posi-
                                                                 tion on land with the engine stopped. If
                                                                 the engine was running, allow the engine
                                                                 oil to settle by waiting 5 minutes or more
                                                                 before checking the oil level.
                                1    2      3                 (2) Open the engine hood. (See page 122.)
                                                              (3) Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
                                                              3-star models (1900 cc engine)

                        1  Dipstick
                        2  Maximum level mark
                        3  Minimum level mark
                        (8) If the  engine oil  level is significantly         1
                            above the maximum level mark, consult
                            a Yamaha Boat dealer. If the engine oil
                            level is below the minimum level mark,
                            slowly add engine oil.
                        (9) Repeat steps (6)–(8) until the engine oil is
                                                              1  Dipstick
                            at the proper level.


                        150]]></page><page Index="163"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 151  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                         Operation and handling requirements

                        4-star models (1800 cc engine)        4-star models



                                          1
                                                                                      1
                                                                                         2







                        1  Dipstick                           1  Maximum level mark
                                                              2  Minimum level mark
                        (4) Insert the dipstick back into the dipstick
                            tube  completely. Remove the  dipstick  (5) If the engine oil  level  is  significantly
                            again and check that the engine oil level  above the maximum level mark, consult
                            is between the minimum level mark and  a Yamaha Boat Dealer. If the engine oil
                            maximum level mark.                  level is below the minimum level mark,
                        3-star models                            add engine oil.
                                                              (6) Remove the engine oil filler cap.
                                                              1800 cc engine models
                                                1
                                                   2                                   1









                        1  Maximum level mark
                        2  Minimum level mark
                                                              1  Engine oil filler cap
















                                                                                             151]]></page><page Index="164"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 152  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                        1900 cc engine models                     Draining the bilge water
                                                              NOTICE

                                                               Do  not  run the engines at  full throttle
                                                               when bilge water remains in the engine
                                     1                         compartment. The bilge water can
                                                               splash into the engines, which can result
                                                               in severe damage.
                                                               Be sure all drain plugs are tightened be-
                                                               fore operating your boat. Otherwise,
                                                               water may flood the boat and cause it to
                        1  Engine oil filler cap               submerge.
                        (7) Slowly add engine oil.
                        (8) Wait approximately  5 minutes to allow  Draining the bilge water on land
                            the engine oil to settle, and then check  This model is equipped with multiple drain
                            the engine oil level again.       plugs.
                        (9) Repeat steps 3–8 until the engine oil is at  Bilge water from the various compartments
                            the proper level.                 flows through drain passages and collects in
                        (10) Install the engine oil filler cap.  the bottom of the hull. The bilge water can be
                        (11) Repeat the checking oil level procedure  drained from the boat by removing the hull
                            for the other engine.             drain plugs.
                        (12) Close the engine hood.
                                                              Engine compartment






                                                                                         1







                                                              1  Engine compartment drain plug
                                                              To drain the bilge water from the hull:
                                                              Remove the hull drain plug at the stern to
                                                              drain the water. Check the condition of the
                                                              O-ring on the hull drain plug, and then se-
                                                              curely install the drain plug.




                        152]]></page><page Index="165"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 153  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                         Operation and handling requirements








                                                                                          1





                                                  1
                        1  Hull drain plug                    1  “BILGE” switch

                        Draining the bilge water on water
                        This model is equipped with a self-draining
                        deck and bilge pump to drain the bilge water
                        on water.

                        Self-draining deck
                        Most water that enters the deck area drains
                        automatically out the stern through the large
                        drain hole in the deck.                       1
                        A one-way check valve in the drain prevents
                        water from traveling back to the deck while
                                                              1  Bilge pump outlet
                        the boat is moored or moving in reverse.
                                                              Even if the bilge pump switch is not turned
                        Bilge pump (AR220 / SX220)            on, the bilge pump will detect when there is
                        Your boat is equipped with a drainage sys-  excessive water in the bilge and will automat-
                        tem that channels water that enters the boat  ically drain most of it through the bilge pump
                        from the storage compartments to the bilge  outlet. This function works automatically,
                        under the engine compartment.         even if the battery switches are turned to the
                        When the bilge pump switch is turned on, the  off position.
                        bilge pump will operate.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              When the bilge pump operates automatically,
                                                              the bilge pump will not stop until most of the
                                                              bilge water is drained.

                                                              Bilge pump (except for AR220 / SX220)
                                                              Your boat is equipped with a drainage sys-
                                                              tem that channels water that enters the boat
                                                              from the storage compartments to the bilge
                                                              under the engine compartment.


                                                                                             153]]></page><page Index="166"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 154  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Operation and handling requirements

                        When the “Bilge” button is tapped, the bilge  222S
                        pump will operate.

                                                                                   1
                                    NW    N    NE
                           FUEL                        DEPTH
                           50  %       FLOAT MODE      0  Ft
                                             °F
                                       Water Temp
                             START                   HOUSE
                             11.8  V                 11.8  V
                            Bilge  Blower        Nav  Anchor
                            1                                 1  “BILGE” switch
                        1  “Bilge” button
                                                              222SE / 222SD











                                                                                        1
                                1
                                                              1  “BILGE” switch
                        1  Bilge pump outlet
                                                               The bilge pump will operate every 2 min-
                        TIP:                                   utes automatically, even if the “Bilge” but-
                         Except  for AR220 / SX220: The “BILGE”  ton is not tapped.
                          switch light comes on while the bilge pump
                          is operating.                       Even if the “Bilge” button is not tapped to op-
                                                              erate the bilge pump, the bilge pump will de-
                                                              tect when there is excessive water in the bilge
                                                              and will automatically drain most of it through
                                                              the bilge pump outlet. This function works
                                                              automatically, even if the battery switches are
                                                              turned to the off position.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              When the bilge pump operates automatically,
                                                              the bilge pump will not stop until most of the
                                                              bilge water is drained.



                        154]]></page><page Index="167"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 155  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                   First-time operation

                                 Engine break-in                Engine break-in (except for
                                 (AR220 / SX220)                       AR220 / SX220)
                         NOTICE                               NOTICE

                        Failure to perform the engine break-in  Failure to  perform the engine break-in
                        could result in reduced engine life or even  could result in reduced engine life or even
                        severe engine damage.                 severe engine damage.

                        The engine break-in period is essential to al-  The engine break-in period is essential to al-
                        low the various components of the engines to  low the various components of the engines to
                        wear and polish themselves to the correct  wear and polish themselves to the correct
                        operating clearances. This ensures proper  operating clearances. This ensures proper
                        performance and promotes longer compo-  performance and promotes  longer  compo-
                        nent life.                            nent life.
                        (1) Check the engine oil level. (See page 149  (1) Check the engine oil level. (See page 150
                            for information on checking  the  engine  for information on checking the engine
                            oil level.)                          oil level.)
                        (2) Launch the boat and start the engines.  (2) Launch the boat and start the engines.
                            (See page 169 for information on starting  (See page 169 for information on starting
                            the engines.)                        the engines.)
                        (3) For the first 5 minutes, operate with the  (3) For the first 5 minutes, operate with the
                            engines at idling speed.             engines at trolling speed.
                        (4) For the next 30 minutes, operate with the  (4) For the next 30 minutes, operate with the
                            engines speed below 5000 r/min.      engines speed below 5000 r/min.
                        (5) For the next 1 hour, operate with the en-  (5) For the next 1 hour, operate with the en-
                            gines speed below 6500 r/min.        gines speed below 6000 r/min.
                        After the engine break-in is complete, the  After the engine break-in is complete,  the
                        boat can be operated normally.        boat can be operated normally.























                                                                                             155]]></page><page Index="168"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 156  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Pre-operation checks


                             WARNING
                        Failure to inspect or maintain the boat properly increases the possibility of an accident
                        or damage to the boat. Do not operate the boat if you find any problem.
                        If a problem cannot be corrected by the procedures provided in this manual, have the
                        boat inspected by a Yamaha Boat Dealer.

                        Pre-operation checklist
                        Before operating this boat, perform the checks in the following checklist. Always follow the inspec-
                        tion and maintenance procedures and schedules described in this owner’s/operator’s manual.
                        Pre-operation checks should be made each time the boat is used. These checks can be com-
                        pleted in a short time. It is worth the time spent to ensure safety and reliability.
                                 ITEM                          CHECK                     PAGE
                         PRE-LAUNCH CHECKS
                         Steering system       Check for proper steering operation.       157
                         Remote control levers  Check for proper throttle operation.      157
                                               Check for proper shift operation.
                         Throttle/shift paddles   Check for proper operation.             158
                         (222SD)
                         Fire extinguisher     Check readiness of the extinguisher.       158
                         Hull                  Check hull for damage and cracks before launching.  —
                         Access port caps      Check for proper installation.             160
                         Jet intakes           Check that no debris is in the intakes before launching.  160
                         Fuel system           Check fuel system for leaks.               160
                         Engine oil level      Check engine oil level; add as necessary.  150
                         Batteries             Check battery condition, mounting, and connection.  162
                         Bilge water           Check the engine compartment for bilge water.  162
                         Drain plug            Check the drain plug for damage and foreign material   162
                                               and check that they are securely installed.
                         Engine compartment and   Open the engine hood and check to be sure no gasoline,   163
                         blowers               gasoline vapors, or loose electrical connections are
                                               present. Operate the blowers for at least 4 minutes.
                         Engine hood           Check that the hood latch is secure.       122
                         Lights and horn       Check lights to be sure they operate. Push the horn but-  164, 166
                                               ton to be sure it operates.
                         Bimini top            Check that the top is secure.            139, 143
                         Engine shut-off cord (lan-  Check the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) for damage.  166
                         yard)
                         Collapsible tower fasteners  Check that the tower fasteners are secured.  138
                         (except for SX220)
                         POST-LAUNCH CHECKS
                         Switches              Check operation of the main switches and engine shut-  167
                                               off switch.
                         Cooling water pilot outlets  Check that water comes out while the engines are running.  167
                         Fuel level            Check fuel level; add as necessary.        167
                        The steering and shifting pre-operation checks will require two persons: one person to oper-
                        ate the controls and one person to observe the proper operation at the stern.
                        156]]></page><page Index="169"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 157  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                           Pre-operation check points
                        Pre-launch checks
                        Perform the pre-launch checks in the pre-op-
                        eration checklist while the boat is on land.

                        Steering system checks
                        Make sure the steering wheel is not loose.
                        There should not be any free play, either in-                    1
                                                                   1
                        and-out or in rotation. Turn the steering wheel             2
                        fully to the right and left to make sure opera-
                        tion is smooth  and unrestricted throughout  1  Jet thrust nozzle
                        the whole range.                      2  Articulating keel

                                                              Remote control lever checks
                                                                  WARNING
                                                              Do not touch the shift gates while the re-
                                                              mote control levers are being operated,
                                                              otherwise, you could be pinched.
                                                              Operate the remote control levers several
                                                 1            times to make sure that operation is smooth
                                                              throughout the whole range.
                        1  Steering wheel
                                                                              N
                        Make sure both jet thrust nozzles change di-  F 3  2  5  1  5   4 R
                        rections as the steering wheel is turned. The
                        jet thrust nozzles should point to starboard  7                     7
                        (right) when the wheel is turned to the right.      6     6
                        The jet thrust  nozzles should point to port  8                       8
                        (left) when the wheel is turned to the left.
                        There should not be free play between the
                        steering wheel and the jet thrust nozzles. In
                        addition, check that the direction of the artic-
                                                              1  Neutral position
                        ulating keel changes according to the move-  2  TDE position
                        ment of the jet thrust nozzles.       3  Forward position
                                                              4  Reverse position
                                                              5  Shift
                                                              6  Fully closed
                                                              7  Throttle
                                                              8  Fully open




                                                                                             157]]></page><page Index="170"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 158  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        222SE: Start the engines before performing  Throttle/shift paddle checks (222SE)
                        the following checks. NOTICE: Do not run  Operate  the throttle/shift paddles several
                        the engines over 4000 r/min on land. Also,  times to make sure that operation is smooth
                        do not run the engines for more than 15  throughout the whole range. Also, make sure
                        seconds without supplying water, other-  that the throttle/shift paddles return automat-
                        wise, the engines could overheat and/or  ically to  their original positions  when re-
                        seize.                                leased.
                        Check that the shift gates are slightly above
                        the shift gate neutral position when the re-   1
                        mote control levers are in the forward posi-
                        tion, and that the shift gates are in the fully
                        open position when the remote control levers
                        are moved farther forward.
                        Fully open position
                          1
                                                                       1
                                                              1  Throttle/shift paddle

                          2                                   Fire extinguisher check
                                                              As an inboard boat less than 26 feet in length,
                                                              your boat must be fitted with one 5-B (B-1)
                                                              type fire extinguisher when navigating waters
                                                              controlled by the U.S. Coast Guard. In addi-
                        1  Shift gate                         tion, most state and local boating laws re-
                        2  Jet thrust nozzle                  quire that the craft carry a USCG-approved
                                                              fire extinguisher whenever the boat is operat-
                        Check that the shift gates are in the fully
                                                              ed.
                        closed position when the remote control le-
                                                              Make sure at least one fire extinguisher is
                        vers are in the reverse position.
                                                              aboard and full; two fire extinguishers are
                        Fully closed position
                                                              recommended. See the instructions supplied
                                                              by the  extinguisher manufacturer to deter-
                                                              mine the indication of the condition.
                          1
                                                              A fire extinguisher is not standard equipment
                                                              with this boat. If you do not have a fire extin-
                                                              guisher,  contact your local  Yamaha Boat
                                                              Dealer or fire extinguisher dealer for one
                                                              meeting the proper specifications.



                        1  Shift gate


                        158]]></page><page Index="171"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 159  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                        Storing the fire extinguisher         the  flames to be  effective. See below for
                        One fire extinguisher is to be mounted in the  FIRE-PORT™ information.
                        driver’s side console compartment. The fire
                        extinguisher recommended for this location
                        is a chemical-type extinguisher with a capac-
                        ity of two pounds or more.


                                                                                     1





                                                              1  FIRE-PORT™




                        If you choose to have two fire extinguishers,
                        the other fire extinguisher is to be mounted in
                        the enclosed head compartment. There is a
                        location label outside the compartment. This
                        fire extinguisher located  near the  engine
                        compartment should be a “clean agent” type
                        designed to displace oxygen, with an inert
                        gas, such as CO , or FE-36™, and have a ca-
                                     2
                        pacity of five pounds or more.        A FIRE-PORT™ is mounted below the engine
                                                              hood. Use this port to spray the contents of a
                                                              fire extinguisher into the engine compartment
                                                              if  a fire breaks out  in  the engine area.
                                                              WARNING! If there is a fire in the engine
                                                              compartment, opening the hatch will add
                                                              more oxygen to the fire, increasing the risk
                                                              of a larger fire or an explosion.
                                                              If you see smoke or otherwise suspect a fire,
                                                              you can look through the transparent flaps of
                                                              the FIRE-PORT™ to look for signs of flames.
                                                              If there is a fire, push the nozzle of the fire ex-
                        Operating the fire extinguisher       tinguisher through the FIRE-PORT™ and fol-
                        A  chemical-type fire extinguisher may not  low the manufacturer’s instructions to empty
                        help when sprayed into the engine compart-  the contents of the fire extinguisher into the
                        ment through the FIRE-PORT™ because that  engine compartment.
                        type needs to be aimed directly at the base of


                                                                                             159]]></page><page Index="172"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 160  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        A “clean agent” type fire extinguisher is rec-
                        ommended; a chemical-type fire extinguisher
                        may not be adequate in this application.

                        Access port cap check
                        Make sure that the access port caps are se-
                        curely installed.
                        To check the access port caps:                  1
                        (1) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                            128 for information on the rear platform
                            hatch.)                           1  Jet intake
                        (2) Make sure that the access port caps are
                            securely installed. If they are removed or  In some cases, the engines may overheat be-
                            are  not locked, securely install  them.  cause of a lack of cooling water, and damage
                            (See page 209 for information on the ac-  could result.  If the jet  intakes are clogged,
                            cess port caps.)                  clean them. (See page 209 for information on
                                                              the jet intakes.) WARNING! Rotating parts
                                                    1         could cause severe injury or death. Before
                                                              attempting to remove weeds or debris
                                                              from the jet intakes or impeller areas; shut
                                                              off the engines, remove the main switch
                                                              keys, and then remove the engine shut-off
                                                              cord (lanyard) from the  engine shut-off
                                                              switch.

                                                              Fuel system checks
                        1  Access port cap                    Check the fuel filler hoses and joints in the
                                                              engine compartment for damage, loose-
                        (3) Close the rear platform hatch.    ness, and signs of leaking. At least annually,
                                                              or if a problem is suspected, check the fuel
                        Jet intake checks                     tank and fuel filler hoses and clamps. Have
                        Carefully check the jet intakes under the boat  a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the fuel tank
                        for weeds, debris, or anything else that might  and fuel filler hoses and clamps. WARNING!
                        restrict the intake of water. If the intakes are  If there are signs of leaking fuel, do not
                        clogged, cavitation could occur, reducing jet  operate the boat until the source of the
                        thrust, and possibly  damaging jet pump  fuel leak is found and corrected. Gasoline
                        parts.                                and its vapors are highly flammable and
                                                              explosive.







                        160]]></page><page Index="173"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 161  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                        Engine oil level check                3-star models (1900 cc engine)
                        Make sure that the engine oil level is between
                        the minimum level mark and maximum level
                        mark on the dipstick. (See page 150 for infor-
                        mation on checking the engine oil level.)
                        3-star models (1050 cc engine)                         1
                                               1





                                                              1  Dipstick





                                                                                     1
                        1  Oil tank filler cap/Dipstick
                                                                                        2







                                                              1  Maximum level mark
                                                              2  Minimum level mark
                                1    2      3
                                                              4-star models (1800 cc engine)


                        1  Dipstick
                        2  Maximum level mark                                   1
                        3  Minimum level mark









                                                              1  Dipstick







                                                                                             161]]></page><page Index="174"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 162  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Pre-operation checks

                                                              (See page 152 for information on draining the
                                                              bilge water.)

                                                              Drain plug check
                                                 1            Loosen the drain plug and remove them, and
                                                   2
                                                              then make sure that the plug and the O-ring
                                                              on the hull drain plug are not damaged and
                                                              that there is no foreign material on the
                                                              threads or the O-ring on the hull drain plug.
                                                              NOTICE: Before installing the drain plug,
                                                              clean the  drain plug threads and the  O-
                        1  Maximum level mark
                        2  Minimum level mark                 ring on the hull drain plug to remove any
                                                              foreign materials, such as dirt or sand.
                        Battery check                         Otherwise, the drain plug could be dam-
                        Make sure that the battery terminals are not  aged, allowing water to enter the engine
                        damaged and that the battery leads are con-  compartment.  Make sure that the drain
                        nected properly.  WARNING! The  battery  plug is tightened securely before launch-
                        must always be fully charged and in good  ing the boat. Otherwise, water may flood
                        condition. Loss of battery power may  the boat and cause it to submerge.
                        leave you stranded. Never  operate the  Securely install the drain plug by tightening it
                        boat if the start battery does not have suf-  until it stop.
                        ficient power to start the engines or if it
                        shows any other signs of decreased pow-
                        er.

                              1
                                                       1




                         2                               2                             1
                                                              1  Hull drain plug

                                                              Blower check (AR220 / SX220)
                        1  Positive (+) battery terminal: Red lead  WARNING
                        2  Negative (–) battery terminal: Black lead
                                                              Gasoline vapors  can explode. Before
                        Bilge water check                     starting the engines, check the engine
                        Make sure that no bilge water has collected in  compartment for  gasoline, gasoline va-
                        the engine compartment. If bilge water has  pors, and loose electrical connections,
                        collected in the engine compartment drain it.  and then operate the blowers for at least 4


                        162]]></page><page Index="175"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 163  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                        minutes. Do not start the engines or oper-  Blower checks
                        ate the blowers if you can smell gasoline  (except for AR220 / SX220)
                        vapors in the  engine compartment or if
                                                                  WARNING
                        there are any loose electrical connections.
                        Contact a Yamaha Boat Dealer if there is a  Gasoline vapors  can explode. Before
                        problem you cannot locate or correct.  starting the engines, check the engine
                                                              compartment for  gasoline, gasoline va-
                        Make sure that the blowers operate properly  pors, and loose electrical connections,
                        when the “BLOWER” switch is pushed.   and then operate the blowers for at least 4
                                                              minutes. Do not start the engines or oper-
                                                              ate the blowers if you can smell gasoline
                                                              vapors in the engine compartment or if
                            1                                 there are any loose electrical connections.
                                                              Contact a Yamaha Boat Dealer if there is a
                                                              problem you cannot locate or correct.
                                                              Make sure that the blowers operate properly.




                        1  “BLOWER” switch



                                                                              1




                                        1                     1  Blower

                                                              To check the operation using the multi-func-
                                                              tion display:
                                                              Tap  the “Blower” button.  Check that  the
                        1  Blower
                                                              blowers operate when the button is blue and
                        Push the blower switch to operate the blow-  that the blowers stop when the button is gray.
                        ers and ventilate the engine compartment for
                        at least 4 minutes.










                                                                                             163]]></page><page Index="176"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 164  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Pre-operation checks

                                                               Do not install lights  that  interfere  with
                                                               the operator’s ability to maintain proper
                                    NW    N    NE
                           FUEL                        DEPTH   lookout.
                           50  %       FLOAT MODE      0  Ft
                                                               Do not modify the manufacturer in-
                                                               stalled navigation lights.
                                             °F
                                       Water Temp
                                                              Make sure that the bow light and anchor light
                             START                   HOUSE
                             11.8  V                 11.8  V  operate properly.
                                                              The procedure for setting up the anchor light
                            Bilge  Blower        Nav  Anchor
                                                              varies according to the model. See the page
                                 1
                                                              indicated below for your boat.
                        1  “Blower” button
                                                              SX220: See page 131.
                                                              TIP:
                        222SE / 222SD
                                                              SX220: Before operating the boat in daylight
                        To check the operation using the switch pan-
                                                              hours after checking the navigation and an-
                        el:
                                                              chor lights, store the anchor light.
                        Push the “BLOWER” switch. Check that the
                                                              Except for SX220
                        blowers operate when the switch light is on
                        and that the blowers stop when the switch
                        light is off.
                                                                      2
                                                                                        1
                                              1





                                                              1  Bow light
                                                              2  Anchor light

                        1  “BLOWER” switch
                        Navigation and anchor lights checks
                             WARNING
                         Do not install lights that could be mis-
                          taken for navigation lights.
                         Do not install lights that could diminish
                          the visibility of  manufacturer installed
                          navigation lights or be confused with the
                          manufacturer installed navigation lights.




                        164]]></page><page Index="177"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 165  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                        SX220                                    the bow light and anchor light come on
                                                                 when the button is blue  and that both
                                    2                            lights go off when the button is gray.
                                                              (2) Tap the “Anchor” light button on the sys-
                                                  1              tem control screen. Check that only the
                                                                 anchor light comes on when the button is
                                                                 blue and that the anchor light goes off
                                                                 when the button is gray.


                                                                         NW    N     NE
                                                                FUEL                        DEPTH
                        1  Bow light                            50  %       FLOAT MODE       0  Ft
                        2  Anchor light
                                                                                   °F
                                                                            Water Temp
                        AR220 / SX220
                                                                  START                    HOUSE
                        To check the operation using the switch panel:  11.8  V            11.8  V
                        Push the right side of the navigation and an-  Bilge  Blower   Nav  Anchor
                        chor lights switch and  check that the bow                     1   2
                        light and anchor light come on.
                                                              1  “Nav” (Navigation) light button
                        Push the left side of the navigation and an-
                                                              2  “Anchor” light button
                        chor lights switch and check that only the an-
                        chor light comes on.
                                                              TIP:
                        Put the navigation and anchor lights switch in
                                                              You can also tap the navigation light indicator
                        the middle position and check that the bow
                                                              and the anchor light indicator on the status
                        light and anchor light are off.
                                                              indicator bar to turn the bow light and anchor
                                                              light on or off.
                                                              222SE / 222SD
                                                              To check the operation using the switch pan-
                                                              el:
                                                    1         Push the “NAV LIGHTS” switch. Check that
                                                              only the anchor light or both the anchor light
                                                              and bow light come on when the switch light
                                                              comes on and that both lights go off when the
                                                              switch light is off.
                        1  “NAV/ANC” switch
                        Except for AR220 / SX220
                        To check the operation using the multi-func-
                        tion display:
                        (1) Tap the “Nav” (Navigation) light button
                            on the system control screen. Check that

                                                                                             165]]></page><page Index="178"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 166  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Pre-operation checks

                                                              222SE / 222SD

                                                                                        1








                                              1

                        1  “NAV LIGHTS” switch
                                                              1  “HORN” switch
                        Horn check
                                                              Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) check
                        Push the “HORN” switch and check that the
                                                              Make sure that the engine shut-off cord (lan-
                        horn sounds.
                                                              yard) is not damaged. If the cord is damaged,
                        The switch light comes on while the horn is
                                                              replace it.  WARNING! Never try to repair
                        operating.
                                                              the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) or tie it
                        AR220 / SX220
                                                              together. The  engine  shut-off cord (lan-
                                                              yard) may not pull free when the operator
                                                     1
                                                              falls off, allowing the boat to continue to
                                                              run and cause an accident.







                        1  “HORN” switch
                        222S



                                                   1          Post-launch checks
                                                              Perform the post-launch checks in the pre-
                                                              operation checklist while  the boat  is in  the
                                                              water and the engines are running.





                        1  “HORN” switch

                        166]]></page><page Index="179"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 167  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                Pre-operation checks

                        Engine shut-off switch check          Cooling water pilot outlet check
                        Check the engine shut-off switch for proper  Check that water comes out from the pilot
                        operation.                            outlets while the engines are running in the
                        (1) Start the engines. (See page 169 for in-  water. If water is not circulating, something
                            formation on starting the engines.)  may be clogging the intake grates. Refer to
                        (2) Pull the engine shut-off cord (lanyard) to  “Jet pump clean-out procedure”  on page
                            remove the clip from the engine shut-off  209.
                            switch  to make sure that the engines
                            stop immediately.
                        (3) Make  sure that  the engines cannot be
                            started with the clip removed from the
                            engine shut-off switch.
                        AR220 / SX220 / 222S





                                                 1
                                                              TIP:
                                          2                   It may take up to 20 seconds for water  to
                                                              reach  the pilot  outlets when first  launching
                                                              the boat. The amount and force of the exiting
                                                              water will vary with engine speed.
                        1  Engine shut-off switch             NOTICE
                        2  Clip
                                                              A continuous flow of water from the pilot
                                                              outlets shows  that water is  flowing
                        222SE / 222SD
                                                              through the engine cooling water passag-
                                                              es. If water is not flowing out of the pilot
                                                              outlets during operation, do not continue
                                                    1         to run the engines. Overheating and seri-
                                                              ous damage could occur. (See “Over tem-
                                                              perature warning” on pages 89 and 117 for
                                                    2         more information.)


                                                              Fuel level check
                                                              Check the amount of fuel remaining in the
                        1  Engine shut-off switch             fuel tank using the fuel level bar graph on the
                        2  Clip                               multi-function display.






                                                                                             167]]></page><page Index="180"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 168  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Pre-operation checks

                        AR220 / SX220


                                          NW     N     NE
                               FUEL
                               50  %         FLOAT MODE
                          1                         °F

                                             Water Temp

                                 START
                                 12.1  V
                        1  Fuel level bar graph
                        222S



                                         NW     N      NE
                              FUEL
                              50  %         FLOAT MODE
                          1                         °F
                                             Water Temp
                                 START
                                 11.8  V
                                Bilge  Blower            Nav
                        1  Fuel level bar graph

                        222SE / 222SD
                            1



                                              SE    S
                          FUEL
                          100 %
                              19
                                     x1000 rpm
                                                    MPH
                             START
                             13.0  V  9
                                      Bilge  Blower
                        1  Fuel level bar graph

                        Add fuel if necessary. (See page 147 for infor-
                        mation on filling the fuel tank.)




                        168]]></page><page Index="181"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 169  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                                Driving your boat
                        Getting to know your boat
                        Operating your boat requires skills acquired
                        through practice over a period of time. Take
                        the time to learn the basic techniques well
                        before attempting more difficult maneuvers.
                        Boating with your new boat can be a very en-
                        joyable activity, providing you with hours of
                        pleasure. But it is essential to familiarize your-
                        self with the operation of the boat to achieve  Always attach the engine shut-off cord (lan-
                        the skill necessary to enjoy boating safely.  yard) to your PFD before operating.
                        Before operating this boat, read this own-  You  and all  other passengers must always
                        er’s/operator’s manual, the  Operation  In-  wear a USCG-approved PFD when riding in
                        struction card, and all labels on the boat. Pay  the boat.
                        particular attention to the safety information  Grip the steering wheel firmly and keep both
                        beginning on page 15. These  materials  feet on the deck when driving the boat.
                        should give you an understanding of the boat
                        and its operation. This boat is designed to  Starting the engines
                        carry one operator and up to 9 passengers.   WARNING
                          Maximum load:                       Severe injury or death may result if you ig-
                            Total weight of cargo, operator, and   nore any of the following:
                            passengers:                        Before operating your boat, become fa-
                              998 kg (2200 lb)                 miliar  with all controls. Consult a
                            Total weight of operator and passen-  Yamaha Boat Dealer about any control
                            gers:                              or function you do not fully understand.
                              843 kg (1860 lb)                 Failure to understand how the controls
                                                               work could cause  an accident or pre-
                                                               vent you from avoiding an accident.
                        Learning to operate your boat
                                                               Gasoline vapors can  explode.  Before
                        Before boating, always perform the pre-oper-
                                                               starting the engines, check the engine
                        ation checks listed on page 156. The short
                                                               compartment for gasoline, gasoline va-
                        time spent checking the boat will reward you
                                                               pors, and loose electrical connections,
                        with added safety and reliability.
                                                               and then operate the blowers for at least
                        Know and follow  U.S. Coast Guard, state,
                                                               4 minutes. Do not start the engines or
                        and local laws when operating your boat.
                                                               operate the blowers  if  you can  smell
                        Select a wide area to learn in, where visibility
                                                               gasoline vapors in the engine compart-
                        is good and other boat traffic is light. Keep
                                                               ment or if there are any loose electrical
                        the proper distance from other boats and ve-
                                                               connections. Contact a  Yamaha Boat
                        hicles.  Do not operate  where people are
                                                               Dealer if there is a problem you cannot
                        swimming.
                                                               locate or correct.
                                                                                             169]]></page><page Index="182"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 170  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Operation

                         Attach the engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                          to your PFD before operating. Failure to
                          attach the cord could  result in a run-
                          away boat if the operator is ejected.
                         Do not apply throttle when anyone is at
                          the rear of the boat. Turn the engines off
                          or keep them at idle. Water and debris
                          exiting the jet thrust nozzles can cause
                          severe injury.
                                                                                       1
                        (1) Always make sure the boat is launched
                            and used in waters that are free from  1  Hull drain plug
                            weeds and  debris,  and at least 90 cm
                                                              (2) Turn the battery switch to the ON posi-
                            (3 ft) deep from the bottom of the boat.
                                                                 tion.
                            WARNING! Never operate in water
                                                              (3) Turn the main switch keys to the on po-
                            that is less than 90 cm (3 ft) deep from
                                                                 sition to operate the blowers automati-
                            the bottom of the boat. You increase
                                                                 cally for 5 minutes.
                            your chance of hitting an underwater
                                                              TIP:
                            obstacle. You could be injured. Peb-
                                                              To operate the blowers manually, tap the
                            bles or sand can also be sucked into
                                                              “Blower” button. Ventilate the engine com-
                            the  jet intakes,  damaging the impel-
                                                              partment for at least 4 minutes, and then tap
                            lers.
                                                              the “Blower” button again  to turn  off the
                                                              blowers.
                                                                         NW    N     NE
                                                                FUEL                        DEPTH
                                                                50  %       FLOAT MODE       0  Ft
                                     90 cm (3 ft)
                                                                                   °F
                                                                            Water Temp
                                                                  START                    HOUSE
                                                                  11.8  V                  11.8  V
                                                                  Bilge  Blower        Nav  Anchor
                         NOTICE                                       1

                        There is a hull drain plug at the bottom of  1  “Blower” button
                        the  stern. Check the O-ring on  the  hull
                        drain plug and make sure that the plug is  TIP:
                        tightened securely  before launching the  Except for 222S: You can also  push the
                        boat. Otherwise, water may flood the boat  “BLOWER” switch  to ventilate the engine
                        and cause it to submerge.             compartment.





                        170]]></page><page Index="183"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 171  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                        AR220 / SX220                         AR220 / SX220 / 222S


                                                                           1
                                                                     2
                            1
                                                                                    3







                        1  “BLOWER” switch                    1  Engine shut-off switch
                                                              2  Clip
                        222SE / 222SD                         3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)

                                              1               222SE / 222SD



                                                                                     3




                                                                         1
                                                                         2
                        1  “BLOWER” switch

                        (4) Attach the engine shut-off cord (lanyard)  1  Engine shut-off switch
                            to your PFD. Install the clip onto the en-  2  Clip
                            gine shut-off switch by pushing the clip  3  Engine shut-off cord (lanyard)
                            groove over the nut beneath the knob.
                            Be sure the cord is not wrapped around  TIP:
                            the steering wheel or tangled in the con-  The engines will not start when the clip is re-
                            trols.  WARNING! Check  that the en-  moved from the engine shut-off switch.
                            gine shut-off cord (lanyard) is   (5) Put the remote control levers in the neu-
                            attached correctly. If the engine shut-  tral position. The starter motors will not
                            off cord (lanyard) is not attached cor-  operate unless the remote control levers
                            rectly, it may not pull free when the  are in neutral.
                            operator falls off, allowing the boat to  (6) AR220 / SX220 / 222S: Turn  the  main
                            continue to run and  cause  an acci-  switch keys to the start position and re-
                            dent.                                lease them when the engines start. If the
                                                                 engines do not start after 5 seconds of
                                                                 cranking, release the keys. Wait at least


                                                                                             171]]></page><page Index="184"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 172  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Operation

                            15 seconds before trying to start the en-
                            gines again.
                        AR220 / SX220











                                                              (8) 222SE / 222SD: Push the “START/STOP”
                                                                 buttons and release them when the en-
                                                                 gines start. If the engines do not start af-
                        222S
                                                                 ter  5 seconds of cranking, release  the
                                                                 buttons. Wait at least 15 seconds before
                                                                 trying  to start  the engines again.
                                                                 NOTICE: If the starter motors are en-
                                                                 gaged continuously for more than 5
                                                                 seconds, the start battery will become
                                                                 quickly discharged and it will be im-
                                                                 possible to start the engines. The
                                                                 starter motors may also be damaged
                                                                 if they are engaged continuously for
                                                                 more than 5 seconds.
                         NOTICE
                         Never turn the main switch keys to the
                          start position while the engines are run-
                          ning. The starter mechanisms could be
                          damaged.
                         If the starter motors are engaged con-
                          tinuously for more than 5 seconds, the
                          start battery will become quickly dis-
                          charged and it will be impossible to start
                                                                               1
                          the  engines. The starter motors may
                          also be damaged if they are engaged  1  “START/STOP” button
                          continuously for more than 5 seconds.
                                                              On this boat, the engines are connected di-
                        (7) 222SE  / 222SD: Turn  the main  switch  rectly to the drive units. Starting either engine
                            key to the on position.           generates some thrust immediately. Only
                                                              enough throttle should be applied to keep the
                                                              engine at a fast enough idle to stay running.


                        172]]></page><page Index="185"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 173  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                  Operation


                                                              TIP:
                        Stopping the engines                  The engines can also be stopped by pulling
                             WARNING                          the engine shut-off cord (lanyard).
                        Once the engines have stopped, you have
                                                              (3) Remove  the main switch keys and  the
                        NO STEERING CONTROL over  the boat.
                                                                 engine shut-off cord (lanyard) if the boat
                        You could collide with another boat,  a
                                                                 will be left unattended.
                        dock, or other obstacle.
                        Stopping the engines immediately after oper-  To stop the engines (222SE / 222SD):
                        ating at  high  engine speeds is  not recom-  (1) Return the remote control levers to the
                        mended. Let the engines cool off at idle or  neutral position.
                        low speed for a few minutes first.    (2) Push the “START/STOP” buttons.
                        To stop the engines (AR220 / SX220 / 222S):
                        (1) Return the remote control levers to the
                            neutral position.
                        (2) Turn the main switch keys to the off po-
                            sition.
                        AR220 / SX220




                                                                               1
                                                              1  “START/STOP” button

                                                              TIP:
                                                              The engines can also be stopped by pulling
                                                              the engine shut-off cord (lanyard).
                                                              (3) Turn the main switch key to the off posi-
                        222S                                     tion.




















                                                                                             173]]></page><page Index="186"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 174  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Operation

                        (4) Remove the main switch key and the en-  Steering control depends on the combination
                            gine shut-off cord (lanyard) if the boat will  of steering wheel position and the amount of
                            be left unattended.               throttle.
                                                              Water sucked in through the intake grates is
                        Leaving a dock                        pressurized by the impellers in the jet pumps.
                        Because boats steer from the stern, the stern  As the pressurized water is expelled from the
                        first moves in the direction opposite your de-  pumps through the jet thrust nozzles, it cre-
                        sired turn. It is especially important to under-  ates thrust to move and steer the boat. The
                        stand this characteristic when leaving a dock.  higher the engine speed, the more thrust is
                        If you move the remote control levers to the  produced.
                        forward position and simply turn the steering  The amount of jet thrust, in addition to the po-
                        wheel to steer the bow away from the dock,  sition of the steering wheel, determines how
                        as you  would when driving a car out of a  sharply you turn.
                        parking space, you will drive the stern of the  A. More throttle produces high thrust, so
                        boat into the dock.                      the boat will turn more sharply.
                        The following  steps  are basic maneuvering
                        techniques which can be used in most cir-  A
                        cumstances:
                        (1) With the engines idling and the bow still
                            moored to the dock, turn the steering
                            wheel toward the dock. Moving the re-
                            mote control levers into the TDE position
                            or forward position will start to move the
                            stern of the boat away from the dock.
                        (2) When the stern is out a few feet, release
                            the bow  mooring, and then turn  the
                                                              B. Less throttle produces low thrust, so the
                            steering wheel to the center position or
                                                                 boat will turn more gradually.
                            away from the dock. Move the remote
                            control levers into  the reverse  position  B
                            and move away from the dock.

                        Turning the boat
                             WARNING
                         Do not pull the remote control levers
                          back to idle when trying to steer away
                          from objects — you need throttle to
                          steer.
                         Be sure passengers are holding on be-  C. Pulling the remote control levers back to
                          fore making turns. An unprepared pas-  idle or the neutral position produces only
                          senger could lose balance and fall.    minimum thrust. If you are traveling  at
                                                                 speeds above trolling, you will have rap-


                        174]]></page><page Index="187"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 175  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                            idly decreasing ability to steer without  Turning left
                            throttle. You may still have some turning
                            ability immediately after  pulling the re-
                            mote  control levers back to  idle, but
                            when the engines slow down, the boat
                            will no longer respond to steering wheel
                            input until you apply throttle again or you
                            reach a trolling speed.
                            At trolling speed, the boat can be turned
                            gradually by steering wheel  position
                            alone using  just the  amount of thrust
                            available at engine idle.         Turning right
                         C













                        D. If the boat is moving and the remote con-
                            trol levers are in the neutral position, or if
                            there is no thrust because  the engines
                            are stopped, the  boat will  go  straight
                            even though the steering wheel is turned.
                            You need throttle to steer.

                         D



















                                                                                             175]]></page><page Index="188"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 176  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Operation

                        Boating with passengers               Stopping the boat
                             WARNING                              WARNING

                        When  passengers  are on board, make   Allow adequate stopping distance.
                        sure they are seated and holding onto the   Take early action to avoid collisions. Re-
                        handgrips, handrails, or straps before you  member, boats do not have brakes.
                        start to accelerate. An unprepared  pas-   Operate defensively at safe speeds and
                        senger could lose balance and fall.    keep a safe distance away from people,
                                                               objects, and other boats to give you time
                        Your boat is designed for one operator and
                                                               to stop.
                        up to 9 passengers only. Never have more
                                                               Do not shut the engines off when slow-
                        than 10 people in the boat. Passengers must
                                                               ing down in case you need engine power
                        sit in one of the seats and hold onto the hand-
                                                               to steer away from a boat or other ob-
                        grips. Passengers should sit so the weight in
                                                               stacle that comes into your path.
                        the boat is balanced from side-to-side and
                                                               You will lose steering control if you com-
                        bow-to-stern as much as possible. If the pas-
                                                               pletely pull  the  remote control levers
                        senger seat in front of the helm is used, be
                                                               back to idle. You need throttle to steer.
                        sure  the operator’s view ahead is not ob-
                                                               Do not use the reverse function to slow
                        structed.
                                                               down or stop the boat from planing
                          Maximum load:                        speed as it could cause you to lose con-
                            Total weight of cargo, operator, and   trol, be ejected, or impact the steering
                            passengers:                        wheel or other parts  of  the  boat. This
                              998 kg (2200 lb)                 could increase the risk of serious injury.
                            Total weight of operator and passen-
                                                              The  boat  is not equipped with a  separate
                            gers:
                                                              braking system. It is stopped by water resis-
                              843 kg (1860 lb)
                                                              tance after the remote control levers  are
                                                              moved back to idle.
                                                              The stopping distance is different depending
                                                              on the model.
                                                              1050 cc engine models:
                                                                105 m (345 ft)
                                                              1800 cc engine models:
                                                                131 m (430 ft)
                                                              1900 cc engine models:
                                                                124 m (406 ft)
                                                              The stopping distance varies depending on
                                                              gross weight, water surface conditions, and
                                                              wind direction. The stated straight-line stop-
                                                              ping distance should be used for a reference.
                                                              The boat slows down as soon as the remote
                                                              control levers are returned to idle but will


                        176]]></page><page Index="189"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 177  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                        coast for a distance before fully stopping. If  Boarding from the water
                        you are not sure you can stop in time before
                                                                  WARNING
                        hitting an obstacle, apply throttle and turn in
                        another direction.                    To avoid severe injury or  death, do  not
                        1050 cc engine models                 board from the rear, use swim platform, or
                        AR220 / SX220                         swim behind boat if the engines are run-
                                                              ning.
                                                               Severe internal injuries can occur if wa-
                                                               ter is forced into body cavities as a re-
                             105 m (345 ft)                    sult of being near the jet thrust nozzles.
                                                               Exhaust gases coming from underneath
                                                               the swim platform contain carbon mon-
                                                               oxide, a colorless, odorless gas which
                                                               may cause brain damage or death when
                                                               inhaled. Symptoms include nausea, diz-
                                                               ziness, and drowsiness.
                                                              (1) Be sure the engines are off,  and  then
                        1800 cc engine models                    move to the stern of the boat.
                        222S / 222SE
                                                              (2) Pull out the stern ladder and  climb up
                                                                 onto the swim platform. (See page 134
                                                                 for information on the stern ladder.)
                             131 m (430 ft)










                        1900 cc engine models
                        222S / 222SE / 222SD
                                                              (3) Return the stern ladder to the stowed po-
                                                                 sition, and then sit in one of the seats
                                                                 provided.
                             124 m (406 ft)
                                                              Boarding from the bow
                                                              A bow ladder is available when boarding from
                                                              the bow of the boat is desired, when the boat
                                                              is beached. (See page 133 for bow ladder us-
                                                              ing procedures.)



                                                                                             177]]></page><page Index="190"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 178  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Operation

                        Boarding from a dock or landing jetty  (3) Approach the dock at idle speed. Use re-
                        (1) Board the boat from the side. One per-  verse as necessary during slow-speed
                            son should board at a time by stepping  maneuvering to help control speed and
                            into the boat. Never jump in. Avoid step-  direction. Position the boat according to
                            ping on slick gelcoat  surfaces  on  the  wind and water conditions. WARNING!
                            boat’s gunwales, especially if wet.  Do not use your hand, arm, or other
                        (2) Sit in one of the seats provided and put  parts of your body to try to keep the
                            both feet on the deck.               boat from hitting the dock. You could
                                                                 be injured if the boat pushes against
                        Docking                                  the dock.
                        (1) Make sure  no obstructions, boats,  or
                            swimmers are close to the boat. Come to  Wind or current pushing boat away from
                            a stop before you reach the dock.  dock:
                        (2) Notice how wind and water currents are  Slowly approach the dock at about a 45° an-
                            affecting boat movement as you attach  gle. Secure the bow to the dock, and then
                            your mooring lines and fenders.   use engine thrust or a boat hook to gently
                                                              move the stern to the dock.


                                                                            Wind or current











                                                              Wind or current pushing boat toward
                                                              dock:
                                                              Slowly maneuver to a shallow angle and al-
                                                              low the boat to move toward the dock.


                                                                       Wind or current














                        178]]></page><page Index="191"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 179  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                        No wind or current:                   Beaching
                        Approach the dock at a shallow angle. Se-  NOTICE
                        cure the bow to the dock, and then use en-
                        gine thrust or a boat hook to gently move the   Small pebbles, sand, seaweed, and oth-
                        stern to the dock.                     er debris can be sucked into the jet in-
                                                               takes and  impair or  damage the
                        To dock using the DRiVE mode (222SD):  impellers. Always stop the engines be-
                        Move the remote control levers to the neutral  fore beaching the boat. Be sure the boat
                        position, and then activate the DRiVE mode.  is in water 90 cm (3 ft) deep from the
                        (See page 101.)                        bottom  of the boat  before starting the
                        Pull the throttle/shift paddle (right) to move  engines again.
                        the boat forward or pull the throttle/shift pad-   Do not beach the boat on rocky beach-
                        dle (left) to move the boat in reverse at a slow  es. The hull gelcoat and exposed pump
                        speed and dock the boat.               housings can be damaged.
                                                               Pay attention to shifts in tides. Beaching
                                                               at high tide may make it impossible to
                                              1                re-launch the boat if the tide recedes.
                            2                                 (1) Make  sure no obstructions, boats, or
                                                                 swimmers are near the beach.
                                                              (2) Approach the beach slowly and stop the
                                                                 engines when the water is about 90 cm
                                                                 (3 ft) deep from the bottom of the boat.
                                                                 Remember: turning is  impossible with
                                                                 the engines stopped.
                        1  Throttle/shift paddle (right)      (3) Get out of the boat and pull the bow up
                        2  Throttle/shift paddle (left)
                                                                 on the beach.
                                                              (4) When leaving the beach, push the boat
                                                                 out into water that is at least 90 cm (3 ft)
                                                                 deep from the bottom of the boat before
                                                                 starting the engines.



















                                                                                             179]]></page><page Index="192"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 180  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Operation

                        Anchoring                             (6) If the anchor is stuck on the bottom, try
                                                                 this: Let out a few feet of anchor line and
                             WARNING
                                                                 secure the line to the boat, again. Slowly
                        Always anchor from the bow. Anchoring    maneuver the boat around the  anchor
                        from  the stern will  make the boat un-  until the anchor pulls loose. Keep the line
                        steady. A strong current can pull a stern-  taut during this procedure.
                        anchored boat underwater.
                                                              Crossing wakes and swells
                        Select an  anchor appropriate for your boat
                                                              You will not always have flat, smooth water.
                        and water conditions. A “Danforth” (or fluke)
                                                              There will be  swells and wakes  from other
                        type anchor is suitable for most applications;
                                                              boats, etc.
                        your  Yamaha Boat Dealer can help you
                                                              The best way to cross wakes and swells is
                        choose an anchor.
                                                              with the least jolt to you and the boat. Small
                        (1) Make sure the anchor line is securely tied
                                                              swells are not as difficult to cross as larger
                            to the anchor and to the bow eye or a
                                                              swells or wakes. Crossing a sharp wake gives
                            bow cleat.
                                                              more of a jolt than a broad swell.
                        (2) Move the  boat to  the spot where  you
                            want to lower the anchor, heading the
                            boat into the wind or current. Stop the
                            boat, and then lower the anchor until it
                            hits bottom.
                        (3) While keeping tension on the line, slowly    Sharp wakes
                            back up the boat until you have let out
                            line that is 4–6 times the depth of the wa-
                            ter. For example, if you are anchoring in
                            10 feet of water, let out 40–60 feet of line.  Broad swell
                            Secure the line.
                        (4) Pull on the line to be sure the anchor is  To cross a wake or swell, change your speed
                            holding.  Also, periodically check  your  and choose the angle at which you cross the
                            boat’s position against the shoreline to  wake or swell. Usually, a slower speed and
                            make sure it is not drifting and dragging  “quartering” the wake (crossing at an angle)
                            the anchor. Reset if necessary.   will reduce the jolt.
                        (5) To pull in (“weigh”) the anchor, start the  Two other things you may notice. The first is
                            engines and move forward, keeping ten-  that crossing a group of wakes or swells is
                            sion on the line as you pull it in. When the  not as easy or smooth as crossing just one
                            anchor line is straight up and down, pull  wake. The second is that when you quarter
                            hard to lift the anchor from the bottom  the wake or swell, the boat will try to steer
                            material.                         away from the wake or swell. When crossing
                                                              at a 45° angle, you may not notice this, but at
                                                              a smaller angle, say 10°, it can be very strong.
                                                              Be prepared to steer and balance as neces-
                                                              sary.


                        180]]></page><page Index="193"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 181  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                  Operation

                                                                  Post-operation checks
                            Wake
                                                              These post-operation procedures are devel-
                                                              oped to help preserve the long-term appear-
                                                              ance and reliability of your boat. Perform
                                                              these procedures as soon as possible after
                                                              the boat is loaded back on the trailer after the
                                                              day’s use.
                            90˚
                                                              Some owners prefer to moor their boat sea-
                                      45˚                     sonally, rather than keeping it on the trailer
                                                10˚           between uses.  Extended mooring  is not
                                                              recommended by Yamaha, but can  be
                                                              performed if proper precautions are taken
                                                              to help guard against prolonged environ-
                                                              mental exposure and  marine  growth.
                                                              Proper flushing of the cooling system on
                                                              each engine is not possible with the boat in
                                                              the water. In addition, conditions  such  as
                                                              stray electrical voltage in the water, marine
                                                              organisms, and saltwater corrosion can ad-
                                                              versely affect the life of many boat compo-
                                                              nents.  NOTICE: Leaving the  boat in the
                                                              water for extended periods will accelerate
                                                              the rate of normal deterioration of the ex-
                                                              posed drive components.
                                                              If you do decide to moor your boat, be sure to
                                                              remove it from the water periodically to clean
                                                              the hull and jet pump areas. The frequency of
                                                              maintenance required will depend upon
                                                              whether the water is salt water or fresh water
                                                              and other local water conditions. See your
                                                              dealer for additional  preventative mainte-
                                                              nance recommendations on mooring and/or
                                                              saltwater use for your area.
                                                              (1) After putting the boat on the trailer, flush
                                                                 the cooling system on each  engine to
                                                                 prevent the cooling  system from  clog-
                                                                 ging up with salt, sand, or dirt. Refer to
                                                                 page 187 for the cooling system flushing
                                                                 procedure.
                                                              (2) Drain residual water from the exhaust
                                                                 system by starting the engine, and then


                                                                                             181]]></page><page Index="194"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 182  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Operation

                            alternately pushing the remote control le-  (9) Reinstall the hull drain plug.  NOTICE:
                            ver up to half throttle and back to idle for  Tighten the hull drain  plug  securely
                            10 to 15 seconds. NOTICE: Do not run  before launching the boat. Otherwise,
                            the engine over 4000 r/min on land. Al-  water may flood the boat and cause it
                            so, do not run the  engine for more  to submerge. Clean any foreign mate-
                            than 15 seconds  without supplying   rial, such as dirt or sand, from the
                            water, otherwise, the  engine  could  threads  and the O-ring on the hull
                            overheat and/or seize.               drain plug before installing the drain
                        (3) Stop the engine.                     plug.
                        (4) Wash down the hull, helm, and both jet  (10) Spray a rust inhibitor, such as Yamaha
                            drive units with fresh water.        Silicone Protectant and Lubricant, on
                        (5) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page  metallic parts to minimize corrosion.
                            128 for rear platform hatch opening and  (11) Use a boat cover designed for your boat,
                            closing procedures.)                 or store the boat in a building or under a
                        (6) Remove the access port caps to let any  canopy or carport in order to prevent rain
                            water  drain that  has pooled on  them.  from falling onto the boat. Because all of
                            (See page 209 for access port cap re-  the water will not be drained from the
                            moval and installation procedures.) If the  deck automatically, take sufficient mea-
                            boat will be stored on the trailer nearby,  sures to prevent rainwater from entering
                            leave the caps out until you prepare to  the boat. NOTICE: Make sure that the
                            launch the boat again. If the boat will be  turnbuckles on the boat cover do not
                            transported on the trailer any distance,  contact the boat directly when using
                            temporarily reinstall the caps and close  the cover. Otherwise, the boat could
                            the hatch until you get home. Open the  be damaged.
                            hatch again when you arrive and remove  (12) Turn the battery switch to the OFF (red)
                            the caps as before. Leave the caps loose  position. (See page 42 for more informa-
                            until you plan to transport the boat on the  tion.)
                            trailer again. NOTICE: Leaving the ac-
                            cess port caps out when you are not
                            using or transporting the boat helps
                            keep them from becoming stuck in the
                            access ports.
                        (7) Remove the hull drain plug. (See page
                            152.)
                        (8) Rinse the engine compartment with a
                            small amount of fresh water. Be careful
                            not to get water on the air filter area or
                            electrical components. Allow any water
                            in the bilge to drain out. After the water
                            has drained, wipe the engine compart-
                            ment and bilge with dry rags.



                        182]]></page><page Index="195"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 183  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                   Trailering

                                Trailering the boat           Use safety chains between the towing vehicle
                                                              and the trailer so the trailer will not detach
                             WARNING
                                                              completely from the towing vehicle if it acci-
                        Avoid accident and injury from improper  dentally comes loose from the hitch ball.
                        trailering:                           Crisscross the chains under the trailer tongue
                         The  trailer must be matched  for  the  so the tongue will not hit the road surface if it
                          boat’s weight and hull.             falls loose. Rig the chains as tightly as possi-
                         The towing vehicle must have the ca-  ble while allowing just enough slack to permit
                          pacity of pulling the load. Pulling a load  tight turns.
                          that exceeds the towing capacity may  Be sure the tongue weight (vertical weight on
                          cause loss of control.              the hitch point) is correct. Generally, 5% to
                         Be sure the boat is secured to the trailer  10% of the combined weight of the boat and
                          and the trailer is properly hitched to the  trailer should be on the tongue. Too much or
                          towing vehicle before towing.       too little weight can cause difficult steering or
                         Read the manuals supplied with the  trailer swaying.
                          trailer by the manufacturer.
                                                              Trailering checklist
                        A trailer is provided as standard equipment
                                                               Check your state laws to be sure your trail-
                        with your boat. If you need to obtain another
                                                               er meets all regulations, such as proper li-
                        trailer, choose one that  is manufactured  to
                                                               censing, brake, axle load, and safety chain
                        carry a boat of the size and weight of your
                                                               requirements.
                        boat. Check the certification label on the left
                                                               Check the trailer for any loose fasteners or
                        forward side of the trailer. This label  is  re-
                                                               damaged parts.
                        quired to show the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
                                                               Check the tires for proper inflation.
                        ing (GVWR), which is the load carrying
                                                               Check the wheel bearings and wheel lug
                        capacity of the trailer plus the trailer’s weight.
                                                               nuts before each trip.
                        Be sure that the total weight of your boat, any
                                                               Check the tail, brake, and turn signal lights
                        cargo, and the trailer weight itself does not
                                                               for proper operation.
                        exceed the GVWR.
                        Hitch
                        The trailer hitch ball must match the size of
                        the socket on the trailer hitch coupler. Hitch-
                        es are divided into classes that specify the
                        Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) and the maxi-
                        mum tongue weight. Always use a hitch rated
                        for the same or higher class. Use a bolted-on
                        or welded-on hitch; clamp-on bumper hitch-
                        es are not recommended. Be sure the trailer
                        hitch’s release handle is latched with the lock
                        pin installed before towing.



                                                                                             183]]></page><page Index="196"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 184  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Trailering

                         Secure the bow of the boat to the trailer  tion) and the rear platform hatch is closed
                          with the winch line and also with the chain.  securely.
                          Secure the stern eyes to the trailer with tie-   Be sure any cargo that must be carried in
                          downs.                               the boat as well as the folding windshield
                                                               and all hatches are  secured. A durable,
                                                               properly fitting cover, such as the genuine
                                                               Yamaha cover available from your Yamaha
                                                               Boat Dealer designed specifically for your
                                                               boat, is highly recommended to help pro-
                                                               tect your boat  during  transport and stor-
                                                               age.
                                                               Carry a spare tire for the trailer, along with
                                                   1           sufficient tools to change the tire.
                                                               While traveling, check the wheel hubs on
                                                               the trailer whenever you park. If a hub feels
                        1  Bow eye
                                                               abnormally hot, have the bearing inspected
                                                               before continuing your trip. On longer trips,
                                                               it is a good idea to carry a set of spare
                                                               wheel bearings, seals, and races.
                                                               When making a turn, do not cut corners.
                                                               The trailer has a smaller turning circle, so it
                                                               turns more sharply around the corner than
                                                               the towing vehicle.

                                                              Backing your trailer
                                         1
                                                              It takes practice to back a trailer successfully.
                                                              If you are not familiar backing up with a trailer,
                        1  Stern eye
                                                              practice first in an open area away from ob-
                         Take down and store  the  bimini top,  if  stacles.
                          used. The bimini top is not designed to stay
                          unsecured on the boat at highway speeds.
                          (See page 142 or 145.)
                        TIP:
                        During transport, use a boat cover to prevent
                        any items from blowing out of the boat, or
                        make sure to store any items inside the stor-
                        age compartments and securely close the
                        compartments.
                         Be sure the access port caps are properly
                          installed (see page 209 for more informa-




                        184]]></page><page Index="197"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 185  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                   Trailering

                        Keep the following points in mind when   sible, have a second person stand aside
                        backing up                               as an observer. Stop when  the wheels
                         Back slowly. Make steering adjustments in  are at least halfway submerged. Set the
                          small steps.                           parking brake.
                         Turn the towing vehicle’s wheels opposite  (5) Remove the bow line from the bow eye.
                          the direction you want the trailer to go.  (6) Back the trailer farther into the water until
                         After the trailer begins moving, turn the  just the tops of the  fenders  show, and
                          towing vehicle to follow it.           then reset the parking brake. Board the
                         Have a second person stand by to help di-  boat and start it. If possible, remain on
                          rect you with hand signals.            the trailer until the engines are warm and
                                                                 are responding to throttle.
                        Launching                             (7) Back the boat out into the water, watch-
                        As a courtesy to other boaters, prepare your  ing carefully for people, other boats, or
                        boat for launching before using the ramp.  obstacles.
                        Each launch may have particular differences,
                        such as ramp angle, prevailing wind, waves,  Loading
                        and water currents. If possible, watch a cou-  (1) Disconnect the trailer  lights from the
                        ple of boaters launch their boats first to notice  towing vehicle.
                        any problems. While every boater develops a  (2) Back the trailer down the ramp as close
                        preferred launch procedure, here is a recom-  to 90° to the shoreline as you can. If pos-
                        mended general procedure:                sible, have a second person act as an
                                                                 observer while standing to the side of the
                                                                 trailer. Stop when the tops of the trailer’s
                                                                 fenders are  about  3 inches above  the
                                                                 waterline.
                                                              (3) With the boat moving at the slowest idle
                                                                 speed, guide the boat onto the support
                                                                 rails. Use throttle only if necessary for
                                                                 steering ability.  WARNING! Using too
                                                                 much throttle  can cause the boat to
                                                                 jump  over the front of  the trailer,
                        (1) Perform the pre-operation checks     which can result in injury to the boat
                            shown on page 156 that can be per-   operator and bystanders.
                            formed on land.                   (4) Make sure the boat is centered on the
                        (2) Remove all trailering tie-down lines from  support rails and is headed straight for
                            the boat and attach your docking lines  the bow stop (bumper board). Ease the
                            and fenders, if used.                boat forward until the bow rests against
                        (3) Disconnect the trailer  lights  from the  the bow stop. NOTICE: The winch line
                            towing vehicle.                      is not designed to pull the boat onto
                        (4) Back the trailer down the ramp as close  the trailer.
                            to 90° to the shoreline as you can. If pos-



                                                                                             185]]></page><page Index="198"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 186  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Trailering

                        (5) Attach and  tighten the  winch line.  Lifting
                            NOTICE: The winch line should not be  NOTICE
                            the only line securing the bow during
                            trailering. Use the chain along with the  Do not attach lifting cables to the bow eye,
                            winch to secure the boat to the trailer.  cleats, stern eyes, ski tow hook, or hand-
                                                              grips. Serious damage to the boat can oc-
                                                              cur. Use only a sling designed specifically
                                                              for lifting boats.
                                                              If you need to remove the boat from the water
                                                              without a trailer, use these guidelines:
                                                               Use a sling-type lifting  mechanism  de-
                                                               signed for lifting boats. The sling should be
                                                               covered with a protective material to pre-
                                                   1
                                                               vent damage to the hull gelcoat.
                                                               Use spreader bars to avoid side stress to
                        1  Bow eye                             the hull that may cause cracks in the gel-
                                                               coat and fiberglass.
                        (6) Pull the trailer up the ramp out of the way   Attach guidelines to the bow eye and stern
                            of other boaters. Attach the bow and  eyes to control movement of the boat dur-
                            stern tie-downs. Reconnect the trailer  ing lifting.
                            lights.                            Remove all people and all cargo from the
                                                               boat. Drain any excess water from the bilge
                                                               using the bilge pump.
                                                               Be sure all people are standing clear, and
                                                               then lift the boat slowly and just far enough
                                                               to verify that the boat is securely held and
                                                               properly balanced. If necessary, lower the
                                                               boat again and adjust the slings.
                                                               When ready, lift the boat slowly and care-
                                         1                     fully.

                        1  Stern eye
                        (7) Perform the post-operation checks  on
                            page 181.











                        186]]></page><page Index="199"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 187  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                       Care and storage

                               Post-operation care            (3) Connect the garden hose to a water tap.
                        Flushing the cooling system           (4) Make sure that the area around the boat
                        Cooling system flushing is essential to pre-  is clear, and then start the engine. Imme-
                        vent the cooling system from  clogging up  diately after the engine starts, fully turn
                        with salt, sand, or dirt.                the water supply on so that water flows
                        (1) Connect the garden hose adapter to a  out continually from the jet thrust nozzle
                            garden hose.                         and cooling water pilot outlet. NOTICE:
                                                                 Never turn on the water before start-
                                                                 ing the engine. The water could flow
                                1                2               back through the muffler into the
                                                                 crankcase causing  severe engine
                                                                 damage. Be sure to turn on the water
                                                                 immediately after starting the engine
                                                                 to prevent engine overheating.
                                                              (5) Run the engine at a fast idle for 3 to 5
                                                                 minutes. If the engine stops while flush-
                                                                 ing, turn the water supply off immediately
                                                                 and perform  the procedure  again from
                        1  Garden hose adapter
                                                                 step 4.
                        2  Garden hose
                                                              (6) Turn off the water supply, and then drain
                        (2) Loosen the flush hose connector cap for  residual water from the exhaust system
                            the engine you are going to flush and re-  by alternately pushing the remote control
                            move it. Insert the garden hose adapter  lever up to half throttle and back to idle
                            into the flush hose connector by pushing  for 10 to 15 seconds.
                            and twisting it until it is securely connect-  (7) Stop the engine. NOTICE: Never have
                            ed.                                  the water on when the engine is not
                                                                 running. The water  could  flow back
                                                                 through the muffler into the crankcase
                            1                                    causing severe engine damage. Do
                                              3                  not run the engine for more than 15
                                                                 seconds  after the water supply  has
                                                                 been turned off to avoid engine over-
                                2                                heating.
                                                              (8) Remove the garden hose adapter.
                                                              (9) Install and tighten the cap securely.
                                                              (10) Repeat  the flushing procedure for  the
                                                                 other engine.



                        1  Flush hose connector
                        2  Flush hose connector cap
                        3  Garden hose adapter


                                                                                             187]]></page><page Index="200"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 188  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Care and storage

                        Cleaning the boat                        ture with clean,  dry  rags.  NOTICE: Be
                                                                 careful not to get water on the air filter
                             WARNING
                                                                 area or electrical components. Do not
                        Gasoline and its vapors are highly flamma-  use high-pressure water when rinsing
                        ble and explosive. If there is fuel or a fu-  the engine or engine compartment as
                        el/water  mixture   in  the   engine     severe engine damage could result.
                        compartment, wipe it up immediately with  (4) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                        dry rags. Do not operate the boat until the  128 for rear platform hatch opening and
                        source of the fuel leak is found and cor-  closing procedures.)
                        rected.                               (5) Remove the access port caps to let any
                                                                 water drain  that has pooled  on them.
                        TIP:
                                       ®
                        Quality Yamaclean , Yamashield™, and oth-  (See page 209 for access port cap re-
                                                                 moval and installation procedures.) If the
                        er Yamalube care products are available from
                                                                 boat will be stored on the trailer nearby,
                        your Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                                                                 leave the caps out until you prepare to
                        (1) Remove the hull drain plug. (See page
                                                                 launch the boat again. If the boat will be
                            152 for hull drain plug removal and instal-
                                                                 transported on the trailer any distance,
                            lation procedures.)
                                                                 temporarily reinstall the caps and close
                                                                 the hatch until you get home. Open the
                                                                 hatch again when you arrive and remove
                                                                 the caps as before. Leave the caps loose
                                                                 until you plan to transport the boat on the
                                                                 trailer again. NOTICE: Leaving the ac-
                                                                 cess port caps out when you are not
                                                                 using or transporting the boat helps
                                                                 keep them from becoming stuck in the
                                                                 access ports. (See page 209 for more
                                                  1
                                                                 information.)
                        1  Hull drain plug                    (6) Securely install  the hull drain plug by
                                                                 tightening it until it stops. NOTICE: Be-
                        (2) Clean the  hull, boat  interior, and  drive
                                                                 fore installing the hull drain plug, clean
                            units with Yamaclean Wash & Wax Con-
                                                                 the drain plug threads and O-ring to
                            centrate, or a mild natural soap, and wa-
                                                                 remove any foreign materials, such as
                            ter. Rinse with fresh water. Scum on the
                                                                 dirt or sand. Otherwise, the hull drain
                            hull can be removed with Yamaclean Hull
                                                                 plug could be damaged, allowing wa-
                            Cleaner™. NOTICE: Incorrect cleaning
                                                                 ter to enter the hull. Check the O-ring
                            can damage vinyl. See “Basic stain
                                                                 on the hull drain plug and make sure
                            guide” on page 190.
                                                                 that the hull drain plug is tightened se-
                        (3) Clean the engine and bilge areas with
                                                                 curely before launching the boat. Oth-
                            Yamaclean Bilge Cleaner™ or an equiv-
                                                                 erwise, water may flood the boat and
                            alent and rinse with fresh water. Drain all
                                                                 cause it to submerge.
                            water and wipe up any remaining mois-
                        188]]></page><page Index="201"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 189  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                       Care and storage

                        (7) Spray the exterior of  the engines with
                            Yamalube Silicone Protectant  &  Lubri-
                            cant, or an equivalent. For areas requir-
                            ing heavy protection, use Yamashield™.
                        (8) Wax the hull  with Yamaclean  Spray
                               ®
                            Wax  or other non-abrasive wax de-
                            signed  for marine gelcoat.  WARNING!
                            Slippery surfaces can cause falls and
                            injury. Be careful not  to  apply too
                            much wax on deck and gunwale step-
                            ping surfaces.  This will  make them
                            slippery.
                        (9) Wipe  all vinyl and  rubber components,
                            such as the seats and engine compart-
                            ment seals, with Yamaclean Vinyl Dress-
                            ing™ or other quality vinyl protectant.
                            NOTICE: Some well-known “protec-
                            tant” products on the market can ac-
                            tually damage vinyl over time. Consult
                            a Yamaha Boat Dealer if you want to
                            use a product other than Yamaclean
                            Vinyl Protectant.
                        (10) Vacuum and hose-off the carpeting as
                            necessary.  If needed, use  Yamaclean
                                        ®
                            Carpet Cleaner  or other quality brand-
                            name carpet cleaner  product to clean
                            soiled areas. NOTICE: Always dry the
                            carpet face up. Never roll up the car-
                            pet. Never fold the carpet.
                        (11) Wash the fabric of the bimini top with a
                            mild natural soap in lukewarm water,
                            then rinse. Do not use detergents. Allow
                            to air dry thoroughly before storage.















                                                                                             189]]></page><page Index="202"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 190  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Care and storage

                        Basic stain guide
                        Here are basic steps to remove common stains from boat upholstery. Consult a Yamaha Boat
                        Dealer or upholstery-cleaning professional for difficult stains.

                         TYPE OF STAIN                 STEPS
                                                       (rinse with clean, warm water and then dry after application)
                                                             1             2             3
                         General care/Dirt                   A             B             —
                         Chewing gum                         E             A             —
                         Coffee/Tea/Chocolate                B             —             —
                         Grease                              E             B             —
                         Ink*                                C             F             D
                         Ketchup                             A             B             —
                         Lipstick                            C             B             A
                         Mustard                             A             B             C
                         Mildew/Wet leaves*                  C             B             A
                         Motor oil                           B             —             —
                         Permanent marker*                   C             F             D
                         Suntan lotion*                      A             B             —
                         Tar/Asphalt                         E             B             —
                        * May cause permanent staining.
                               A       Medium-soft brush with warm, soapy water
                               B       Yamaclean All Purpose Cleaner or equivalent
                               C       Isopropyl alcohol (91% is best)
                                       Mixture of 1 tablespoon (15 ml) ammonia, 1/4 cup (60 ml) hydrogen peroxide, and
                               D
                                       3/4 cup (177 ml) water
                               E       Wipe or scrape off excess (chill gum with ice first)
                               F       Name brand ink remover



















                        190]]></page><page Index="203"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 191  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                       Care and storage

                        Chil Cool Technology vinyl upholstery   (2) Disconnect the ground lead (black) and
                        Cleaning & Care                          the negative (–) battery lead (black).
                        Chil Cool Technology  vinyl  upholstery is a  (3) Disconnect the positive (+) battery lead
                        new material that is cooler to the touch than  (red).
                        standard marine vinyl.                (4) Unfasten the battery strap, and then re-
                        Easy care is required to maintain its longevity  move the battery from the boat.
                        and cooling properties.
                        (1) Mix a solution 30:1, (30 parts warm water  1
                            and 1 part mild NON-BLEACH liquid dish  4                        1
                            soap).
                        (2) Apply and rub with a soft damp cloth.                             2
                        (3) Rinse with clean warm water and wipe                               4
                            dry.                                2
                                                                  3
                        Do use these or similar cleaners                                       3
                         Mild NON-bleach soap & water
                         409 ®                               1  Positive (+) battery lead (red)
                                  ®
                         Boat Bling  Mild Soap Sauce         2  Negative (–) battery lead (black)
                                  ®
                         Boat Bling  Vinyl Sauce             3  Ground lead (black)
                         Babes™ Seat Soap                    4  Battery strap
                        Do not use these or similar cleaners  To store the battery:
                         NO 303 ®                            (1) Clean the battery casing and terminals
                         NO Starbrite ®                         using a mixture of baking soda and water
                                     ®                           (one tablespoon of baking soda to one
                         NO Meguiar’s
                                    ®                            cup of water).
                         NO Fantastic
                                                              (2) Apply dielectric grease or petroleum jelly
                         NO eraser sponges
                                                                 to the  battery terminals and to all ex-
                                                                 posed connectors.
                        Failure to care for your vinyl properly or use of
                                                              (3) If the battery will be stored for a longer
                        improper cleaners will  damage your vinyl.
                                                                 period, check its state of charge (use a
                                                                 hydrometer or a voltmeter and load tes-
                        Battery care
                                                                 ter) at least once a month and recharge
                        If the boat will not be used for more than a
                                                                 the battery if it gets too low.
                        month, remove the battery and store it in a
                                                              To charge the battery:
                        cool, dark place.
                                                              (1) Remove the caps from the cells. Add dis-
                        The battery is located in the engine compart-
                                                                 tilled  water if necessary  to top up  the
                        ment.
                                                                 electrolyte to the proper level.
                        To remove the battery:
                                                              (2) Follow  the battery manufacturer’s  in-
                        (1) Turn the battery switch to the OFF posi-
                                                                 structions for charging.  WARNING!
                            tion. (See page 42.)
                                                                 When charging a battery, keep it well
                                                                                             191]]></page><page Index="204"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 192  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Care and storage

                            away from sparks and open flames, as     Long-term storage
                            it gives off explosive gases. When us-  Storing your boat for prolonged periods of
                            ing a battery charger, connect the bat-  time, such as winter storage in freezing tem-
                            tery to the charger before you turn on  perature, requires preventative maintenance
                            the charger. This will prevent sparking  to ensure against deterioration. It is advisable
                            at the terminals that could ignite bat-  to have the boat serviced by an authorized
                            tery gases.                       Yamaha Boat Dealer before storage. Howev-
                        To install the battery:               er, the  following procedures can be per-
                        (1) Place the battery  in  the battery holder,  formed by the owner with a minimum of tools.
                            and then fasten the battery using the bat-
                            tery strap.                       Fuel system
                        (2) Connect the positive (+) battery lead (red)  Fill the fuel tank with fresh fuel, adding one
                            to the  positive (+) battery terminal.  ounce of Fuel Med RX, available from your
                            NOTICE: Reversal of the battery leads  Yamaha Boat Dealer, to each gallon of fuel or
                            will damage the electrical parts.  use an equivalent according to the manufac-
                        (3) Connect the  negative (–)  battery lead  ture’s instructions. (See page 147 for infor-
                            (black) and the ground lead (black) to the  mation on filling the fuel tank.) Do not “top
                            negative (–) battery terminal.    off” the tank, because fuel could spill. A full
                        (4) Make sure that the battery is securely  fuel tank is less likely to allow condensation
                            held in place.                    to collect in the tank, reducing the chance of
                                                              contaminated fuel. Running the engines with
                                                              treated fuel during  cooling system flushing
                                                              will also help protect the fuel system.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              Use of Fuel Med RX eliminates the need to
                                                              drain the fuel system. Consult a Yamaha Boat
                                                              Dealer or other qualified mechanic if the fuel
                                                              system is to be drained instead.

                                                              Lubrication
                                                              It is advisable to take the boat to a Yamaha
                                                              Boat Dealer to have the engines fogged for
                                                              long-term storage.

                                                              Grease points
                                                              To keep moving parts sliding or rotating
                                                              smoothly, coat them  with water-resistant
                                                              grease.







                        192]]></page><page Index="205"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 193  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                       Care and storage

                                                               Steering cable ball joints and inner wires
                          Recommended water-resistant grease:
                                                              Grease the steering cable and shift cable ball
                            YAMALUBE  MARINE GREASE or
                                                              joints at the jet thrust nozzles.  Extend  the
                            Yamalube Grease A
                                                              steering cable and shift cable inner wires and
                                                              apply a thin coat of grease to them.
                         Throttle cables (AR220 / SX220 / 222S)
                        Grease the throttle-cable inner wires at the
                        pulley wheel of each APS.
                        AR220 / SX220










                                                               Pivot points
                                                              Grease all pivot points  of the  steering and
                                                              shift mechanisms at the pump ends.
                        222S (1800 cc engine)















                        222S (1900 cc engine)
                                                               Bearing housings
                                                              Grease  the bearing housings through  the
                                                              grease nipples.  NOTICE:  Fill the grease
                                                              slowly and carefully, because it can dam-
                                                              age the hoses and the joints.
                                                              The first service should be done after
                                                              10 hours or 1 month by a Yamaha Boat Deal-
                                                              er.
                                                              Fill the bearing housings with water-resistant
                                                              grease through the grease nipples.



                                                                                             193]]></page><page Index="206"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 194  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Care and storage

                                                              1900 cc engine models
                          Grease capacity:
                            33.0–35.0 cc (1.11–1.18 oz)
                        After first service:  Every 100 hours or
                        6 months (you may do this yourself).
                          Grease capacity:
                                                                         1
                            6.0–8.0 cc (0.20–0.27 oz)
                        1050 cc engine models

                                             1
                                                              1  Bearing housing grease nipple










                        1  Bearing housing grease nipple

                        1800 cc engine models
                                1













                        1  Bearing housing grease nipple














                        194]]></page><page Index="207"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 195  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                             Maintenance

                                   Maintenance                Removing and installing the engine
                                                              covers (except for AR220 / SX220)
                             WARNING
                                                              The engine cover of each engine is remov-
                        Be sure to turn off the engines when you  able.
                        perform maintenance  unless otherwise  To remove the engine cover:
                        specified. If you are not familiar with ma-  (1) Open the engine hood. (See page 122.)
                        chine servicing, this work should be done  (2) Remove the engine cover screws.
                        by a Yamaha Boat Dealer or other quali-
                        fied mechanic.                        1800 cc engine models

                        Maintenance, replacement, or repair of  the
                        emission control devices and system may be
                        performed by any marine SI engine repair es-
                        tablishment or individual. Warranty repair,                        1
                        however, must be performed at an autho-
                        rized Yamaha Boat Dealer. A service manual
                        is available for purchase through a Yamaha
                        Boat Dealer for owners  who have the me-
                        chanical skills, tools, and other equipment
                        necessary to perform maintenance not cov-
                                                              1  Engine cover screw
                        ered by this owner’s/operator’s manual.
                                                              1900 cc engine models
                        Owner’s/operator’s manual
                        It is advisable to always carry the own-
                        er’s/operator’s manual with  you whenever
                        you use the boat.
                        To protect these materials from water dam-
                        age, it would be a good idea to put them in a
                        waterproof bag. If  your owner’s/operator’s
                        manual is damaged, order a replacement             1
                        from a Yamaha Boat Dealer.
                        The service information included in this man-
                        ual is intended to provide you, the owner,  1  Engine cover screw
                        with the necessary information for complet-
                        ing  your own preventive  maintenance and  (3) Lift up the engine cover and remove it.
                        minor repairs.











                                                                                             195]]></page><page Index="208"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 196  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Maintenance

                        1800 cc engine models                 1900 cc engine models





                                                    1








                        1  Engine cover                       (2) Install the engine cover screws.
                                                              (3) Close the engine hood.
                        1900 cc engine models











                                      1


                        1  Engine cover

                        To install the engine cover:
                        (1) Place the engine cover in its original po-
                            sition, and then push it down.
                        1800 cc engine models




















                        196]]></page><page Index="209"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 197  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                             Maintenance

                        Periodic maintenance chart
                        The periodic maintenance chart gives general guidelines for periodic maintenance. Have a
                        Yamaha dealer perform the checks in the following chart. However, maintenance may need
                        to be performed more frequently depending on your operating conditions. If you have any
                        questions, consult a Yamaha dealer.
                        This “√” mark indicates items to be checked and serviced by a Yamaha dealer.
                                                                       Initial  Thereafter every
                                                                               50    100    200
                                Item                Operation                 hours   hours   hours
                                                                        10
                                                                       hours  or 12   or 12   or 24
                                                                             months  months  months
                                                                               *1     *1     *1
                         Fuel hoses, clamps,   Check for damage, and check con-
                         canister, and check   nections and tightening of clamps      √
                         valve
                                           Check cap for damage, and check
                         Fuel filler cap                                              √
                                           seal for cracks and deformation
                         Fuel tank         Check installation            √            √
                         Main switches and
                         engine shut-off   Check operation               √            √
                         switch
                                           Check state of charge and termi-
                         Batteries         nals, and check for broken battery         √
                                           straps
                         Battery leads     Check terminals                            √
                         Battery switches  Check operation               √            √
                         Multi-function display  Check lighting          √            √
                         Neutral switches
                         (AR220 / SX220 /   Check operation              √            √
                         222S)
                         Hatch interlock
                         switches (wet stor-  Check operation            √            √
                         age compartment)
                         Blowers           Check operation               √            √
                         Horn              Check operation               √            √
                         Navigation lights  Check lighting               √            √
                                           Clean filter, check hoses for dam-
                         Electric bilge pump  age, and check tightening of            √
                                           clamps
                         Other electrical com-  Check operation of shower, stereo,   √  √
                         ponents           and other components
                         Steering master   Check operation and tilting mecha-  √      √
                         ASSY              nism, and check for looseness




                                                                                             197]]></page><page Index="210"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 198  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Maintenance


                                                                       Initial  Thereafter every
                                                                               50    100    200
                                Item                Operation           10    hours   hours   hours
                                                                       hours  or 12   or 12   or 24
                                                                             months  months  months
                                                                               *1     *1     *1
                                           Check hydraulic fluid level, and
                         Steering system   check for dirt in fluid
                         (hydraulic system)   Check for hydraulic fluid leakage,   √  √
                         (222SD)           and check parts for wear and dam-
                                           age
                                           Check operation from steering mas-
                         Steering system   ter ASSY to jet thrust nozzles, and   √    √
                         (222SD)           check for free play
                                           Check jet pumps for corrosion
                         Steering system   Check connections of connectors,
                         (electrical system)   and check for looseness   √            √
                         (222SD)
                         Steering cables   Check connections and exterior,            √
                         (except for 222SD)  and lubricate
                         Throttle/shift pad-  Check operation            √            √
                         dles (222SD)
                                           Check operation, and check link rod
                         Articulating keel                                            √
                                           for bends and damage
                                           Check exterior and operation,
                         Remote control le-  check shift operation, and check for   √  √
                         vers
                                           looseness
                         Throttle cables   Check connections and exterior,
                         (AR220 / SX220 /   and lubricate                             √
                         222S)
                                           Check connections and exterior,
                         Shift cables                                                 √
                                           and lubricate (shift gate end)
                         Exhaust hoses, wa-  Check for exhaust leakage, and
                         ter locks, and resona-  check clamps at connections          √
                         tors
                         Drain passages    Remove clogs                               √
                         Drain plug        Check O-ring                  √            √
                         Hull and deck     Check for damage              √            √
                                           Check installation and operation,
                         Windshield and seats                            √            √
                                           and check for damage
                         Wakeboard tower   Check installation, and check for
                         (except for SX220)   damage                     √            √
                         and bimini top
                         Hatches, hinges, and   Check installation       √            √
                         packing seals



                        198]]></page><page Index="211"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 199  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                             Maintenance


                                                                       Initial  Thereafter every
                                                                               50    100    200
                                Item                Operation                 hours   hours   hours
                                                                        10
                                                                       hours  or 12   or 12   or 24
                                                                             months  months  months
                                                                               *1     *1     *1
                         Ladders (bow and   Check installation           √            √
                         stern)
                         Access port caps  Check exterior and installation            √
                         Spark plugs       Check                         √            √
                         High-pressure fuel   Check connections and exterior,         √
                         hoses             and check for leakage
                         Engine oil        Replace                       √     √      √
                         Engine oil filters  Replace                                  √
                         Air filter elements  Check for damage and dirt               √
                         Intake hoses and   Check for damage, and check con-          √
                         breather hoses    nections
                         Throttle bodies   Lubricate throttle valves                  √
                         Anodes (engines)  Check for corrosion                              √ *2
                         Valve clearance   Check and adjust                                 √ *2
                         Rubber couplings  Check for looseness and noise                     √
                         Engine mounts     Check for damage and peeling                      √
                         Cooling water hoses   Check for damage, and check con-
                         and cooling water pi-  nections                                     √
                         lot outlet hoses
                         Water inlet strainers  Check for damage         √            √
                         Intake grates     Check for damage              √            √
                                           Check for bends, damage, and for-
                         Impellers                                       √            √
                                           eign material
                         Impeller ducts    Check and lubricate                        √
                                           Check for damage and lubricate
                         Drive shaft spline                                                  √
                                           splines
                                           Check bearings and grease condi-
                         Jet pump bearings                                                   √
                                           tion
                         Jet thrust nozzles  Check movement, and lubricate            √
                         Intermediate hous-  Lubricate                                √
                         ings
                         Anodes (jet pump   Check for corrosion                       √
                         units)
                        *1: Whichever comes first.
                        *2: Check every 200 hours.
                        Perform the pre-operation checks and  post-operation checks  before  performing  periodic
                        maintenance.


                                                                                             199]]></page><page Index="212"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 200  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Specifications

                                       Specifications (1050 cc engine models)

                                         Item                             Specification
                         Boat capacity
                         Maximum people on board             10 person
                         Maximum load capacity               998 kg (2200 lb)
                         Dimensions and weight
                         Length                              6.70 m (264 in)
                         Beam                                2.58 m (102 in)
                         Height                              AR220
                                                             2.73 mm (107 in)
                                                             SX220
                                                             1.88 mm (74 in)
                         Draft                               0.54 m (21.3 in)
                         Dry weight                          AR220
                                                             1605 kg (3538 lb)
                                                             SX220
                                                             1568 kg (3457 lb)
                         Performance
                         Maximum fuel consumption (for each engine)  33.0 L/h (8.7 US gal/h, 7.3 Imp.gal/h)
                         Cruising range at full throttle     4.30 hour
                         Trolling speed                      1500 ±100 r/min
                         Engine
                         Number of engines                   2
                         Engine type                         Liquid cooled 4-stroke, DOHC
                         Number of cylinders                 3
                         Engine displacement                 1049 cm 3
                         Bore × stroke                       82.0 × 66.2 mm (3.23 × 2.61 in)
                         Compression ratio                   11.0 : 1
                         Valve clearance-intake (cold)       0.15–0.22 mm (0.0059–0.0087 in)
                         Valve clearance-exhaust (cold)      0.26–0.32 mm (0.0102–0.0126 in)
                         Lubrication system                  Dry sump
                         Cooling system                      Water
                         Starting system                     Electric
                         Ignition system                     T.C.I.
                         Spark plug (NGK)                    CR9EB
                         Spark plug gap                      0.7–0.8 mm (0.028–0.031 in)
                         Battery capacity                    12 V, 85 Ah
                         Charging system                     Flywheel magneto







                        200]]></page><page Index="213"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 201  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                            Specifications


                                         Item                             Specification
                         Drive unit
                         Propulsion system                   Jet pump
                         Jet pump type                       Axial flow, single stage
                         Impeller rotation                   Counterclockwise
                         Pitch angle                         10.6°
                         Transmission                        Direct drive from engine
                         Jet thrust nozzle angle             23+23°
                         Fuel and oil
                         Recommended fuel                    Regular unleaded gasoline
                         Minimum octane rating (PON)         86
                         Minimum octane rating (RON)         90
                         Fuel tank total capacity            284 L (75.0 US gal, 62.5 Imp.gal)
                         Recommended engine oil              YAMALUBE 4W or 4-stroke motor oil




                         Recommended engine oil type SAE     SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, 20W-40, 20W-50
                         Recommended engine oil grade API    API SG or higher
                         Engine oil total quantity           3.7 L (3.91 US qt, 3.26 Imp.qt)
                         Engine oil quantity without oil filter replacement  3.2 L (3.38 US qt, 2.82 Imp.qt)
                         Engine oil quantity with oil filter replacement  3.4 L (3.59 US qt, 2.99 Imp.qt)
                         Fuse amperage
                         Electronic throttle valve fuse      10 A
                         Fuel pump fuse                      10 A
                         Main relay drive fuse               10 A
                         Main fuse                           20 A
                         Battery fuse                        30 A
                         Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller/Switch
                         Panel fuse                          20 A
                         DC outlet/Power Port/USB fuse       20 A
                         Bilge pump fuse                     4 A
                         Power distribution module fuse      20 A
                         DC outlet fuse                      20 A
                         USB fuse                            3 A
                         Accessory 1 fuse                    3 A
                         Accessory 2 fuse                    3 A
                         Accessory 3 fuse                    3 A
                         Audio fuse                          60 A





                                                                                             201]]></page><page Index="214"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 202  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Specifications

                                 Specifications (1800 cc / 1900 cc engine models)

                                         Item                             Specification
                         Boat capacity
                         Maximum people on board             10 person
                         Maximum load capacity               222S/222SE/222SD
                                                             998 kg (2200 lb)
                         Dimensions and weight
                         Length                              6.70 m (264 in)
                         Beam                                2.58 m (102 in)
                         Height                              2.73 mm (107 in)
                         Draft                               0.54 m (21.3 in)
                         Dry weight                          222S (3-star model)
                                                             1714 kg (3779 lb)
                                                             222S (4-star model)
                                                             1728 kg (3810 lb)
                                                             222SE (3-star model)
                                                             1806 kg (3982 lb)
                                                             222SE (4-star model)
                                                             1820 kg (4012 lb)
                                                             222SD (3-star model)
                                                             1833 kg (4041 lb)
                         Performance
                         Maximum fuel consumption (for each engine)  3-star models
                                                             59.6 L/h (15.7 US gal/h, 13.1 Imp.gal/h)
                                                             4-star models
                                                             43.8 L/h (11.6 US gal/h, 9.6 Imp.gal/h)
                         Cruising range at full throttle     3-star models
                                                             2.38 hour
                                                             4-star models
                                                             3.24 hour
                         Trolling speed                      3-star models
                                                             1500 ±100 r/min
                                                             4-star models
                                                             1300 ±100 r/min
















                        202]]></page><page Index="215"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 203  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                            Specifications


                                         Item                             Specification
                         Engine
                         Number of engines                   2
                         Engine type                         Liquid cooled 4-stroke, DOHC
                         Number of cylinders                 4
                         Engine displacement                 3-star models
                                                             1898 cm³
                                                             4-star models
                                                             1812 cm³
                         Bore × stroke                       3-star models
                                                             88.0 × 78.0 mm (3.46 × 3.07 in)
                                                             4-star models
                                                             86.0 × 78.0 mm (3.39 × 3.07 in)
                         Compression ratio                   3-star models
                                                             11.2 : 1
                                                             4-star models
                                                             11.0 : 1
                         Valve clearance-intake (cold)       0.14–0.23 mm (0.0055–0.0091 in)
                         Valve clearance-exhaust (cold)      0.28–0.37 mm (0.0110–0.0146 in)
                         Lubrication system                  Wet sump
                         Cooling system                      Water
                         Starting system                     Electric
                         Ignition system                     T.C.I.
                         Spark plug (NGK)                    LFR6A
                         Spark plug gap                      0.8–0.9 mm (0.031–0.035 in)
                         Battery capacity                    12 V, 85 Ah
                         Charging system                     Flywheel magneto
                         Drive unit
                         Propulsion system                   Jet pump
                         Jet pump type                       Axial flow, single stage
                         Impeller rotation                   Counterclockwise
                         Pitch angle                         3-star models
                                                             16.1°
                                                             4-star models
                                                             14.5°
                         Transmission                        Direct drive from engine
                         Jet thrust nozzle angle             23+23°











                                                                                             203]]></page><page Index="216"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 204  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Specifications


                                         Item                             Specification
                         Fuel and oil
                         Recommended fuel                    Regular unleaded gasoline
                         Minimum octane rating (PON)         86
                         Minimum octane rating (RON)         90
                         Fuel tank total capacity            284 L (75.0 US gal, 62.5 Imp.gal)
                         Recommended engine oil              YAMALUBE 4W or 4-stroke motor oil





                         Recommended engine oil type SAE     SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, 20W-40, 20W-50
                         Recommended engine oil grade API    3-star models
                                                             API SG or higher
                                                             4-star models
                                                             API SJ or higher
                                                             3-star models
                         Engine oil total quantity
                                                             4.3 L (4.55 US qt, 3.78 Imp.qt)
                                                             4-star models
                                                             5.3 L (5.60 US qt, 4.66 Imp.qt)
                                                             3-star models
                         Engine oil quantity without oil filter replacement
                                                             2.5 L (2.64 US qt, 2.2 Imp.qt)
                                                             4-star models
                                                             3.5 L (3.70 US qt, 3.08 Imp.qt)
                                                             3-star models
                         Engine oil quantity with oil filter replacement
                                                             2.6 L (2.75 US qt, 2.29 Imp.qt)
                                                             4-star models
                                                             3.7 L (3.91 US qt, 3.26 Imp.qt)
                         Fuse amperage
                         Electronic throttle valve fuse      10 A
                         Fuel pump fuse                      10 A
                         Main relay drive fuse               10 A
                         Main fuse                           20 A
                         Battery fuse (222S)                 30 A
                         BCU fuse (222SE / 222SD)            50 A
                         Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller/Switch
                         Panel fuse                          20 A
                         DC outlet/Power Port/USB fuse       20 A
                         DC outlet fuse                      20 A
                         Horn fuse                           7.5 A
                         Bilge pump fuse                     4 A
                         Power distribution module 1 fuse    20 A
                         USB fuse                            3 A
                         Accessory 1 fuse                    3 A


                        204]]></page><page Index="217"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 205  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                            Specifications


                                         Item                             Specification
                         Accessory 2 fuse                    3 A
                         Accessory 3 fuse                    3 A
                         Audio fuse                          60 A
                         EPS 1 fuse (222SD)                  60 A
                         EPS 2 fuse (222SD)                  60 A






















































                                                                                             205]]></page><page Index="218"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 206  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Trouble recovery

                                                   Troubleshooting
                        If you have any trouble with your boat, use this section to check for the possible cause. If you
                        cannot find the cause or if the procedure for replacement or repair is not described in this own-
                        er’s/operator’s manual, ask your Yamaha Boat Dealer or a qualified mechanic for the proper
                        service.

                        Troubleshooting chart
                        The Troubleshooting  chart contains:  “TROUBLE,” “POSSIBLE  CAUSE,” “REMEDY,” and
                        “PAGE.”
                        Check the possible cause and remedy, and also the referred page for the maintenance steps
                        to solve the trouble.
                          TROUBLE            POSSIBLE CAUSE                 REMEDY          PAGE
                         Starter mo-  Engine shut-off   Clip on cord is not in   Install clip in engine shut-off
                         tor does not   switch (222SE /   place     switch                   42
                         turn over   222SD)
                                     Fuse          Burned out       Replace fuse and check wiring  217
                                     Battery       Run down         Recharge                191
                                                   Poor terminal con-  Tighten as required  191
                                                   nections
                                                   Battery switch off  Turn on switch        42
                                     Rear platform   Not latched    Latch securely          128
                                     hatch
                                     Starter compo-  Faulty         Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                     nent                           Boat Dealer
                                     Remote control   Not in neutral posi-  Move remote control lever to   45
                                     lever         tion             neutral position
                                     Throttle/shift pad-  Squeezed  Release                  47
                                     dle (222SD)























                        206]]></page><page Index="219"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 207  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery


                          TROUBLE            POSSIBLE CAUSE                 REMEDY          PAGE
                         Starter mo-  Engine shut-off   Clip on cord is not in   Install clip in engine shut-off
                         tor turns   switch (AR220 /   place        switch                   42
                         over/engine   SX220 / 222S)
                         does not    Fuel          Empty            Refill as soon as possible  147
                         start
                                                   Stale or contaminat-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   ed               Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel tank     Water or dust col-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   lected           Boat Dealer
                                     Spark plug    Fouled or defective  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Crankcase     Filled with fuel  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Filled with water  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel filter   Clogged or water   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   collected        Boat Dealer
                         Warning is   Over temperature  Jet intake clogged  Clean           209
                         displayed   warning*      Cooling system   Clean
                                                   clogged                                  167
                                     Oil pressure   Oil pressure dropped  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                     warning*                       Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel          Empty            Refill as soon as possible  147
                                     Checking engine   Faulty sensors  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                     warning                        Boat Dealer
                         Engine runs   Fuel        Empty            Refill as soon as possible   147
                         irregularly or            Stale or contaminat-  Have serviced by Yamaha
                         stalls                    ed               Boat Dealer              —
                                     Fuel filter   Water or dust col-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   lected           Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel tank     Water or dirt present  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Spark plug    Fouled or defective   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Incorrect heat range   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Gap incorrect    Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                         *Engine speed will be limited to 3500 rpm.









                                                                                             207]]></page><page Index="220"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 208  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Trouble recovery


                          TROUBLE            POSSIBLE CAUSE                 REMEDY          PAGE
                         Boat speed   Cavitation   Jet intake  clogged  Clean               209
                         too slow or   Engine overheat*  Jet intake clogged   Clean         209
                         loses power
                                                   Cooling system   Clean                   167
                                                   clogged
                                     Fuel filter   Clogged          Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Spark plug    Fouled or defective   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Incorrect heat range   Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                                   Gap incorrect    Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                                    Boat Dealer
                                     Fuel          Stale or contaminat-  Have serviced by Yamaha   —
                                                   ed               Boat Dealer
                         *Engine speed will be limited to 3500 rpm.









































                        208]]></page><page Index="221"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 209  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                             Emergency procedures
                        Jet pump clean-out procedure               1
                             WARNING
                        Severe injury or death may result if you ig-
                        nore any of the following:                                         2
                         Turn off and remove both main switch
                          keys, remove the clip from the engine
                          shut-off switch, and wait for all move-
                          ment to stop  before removing the  ac-
                          cess port caps.
                                                              1  Strap eye
                         Never override the interlocks to run the  2  Retaining cord
                          engines with the rear platform hatch
                          open.                               (4) While holding the  handle and  pushing
                         The impellers have sharp  edges.  Be   down, turn the access port cap counter-
                          careful when reaching into jet pump ar-  clockwise until the “SET” mark is aligned
                          eas.                                   with the slot A, and then lift the cap by
                                                                 the handle.
                        If weeds or debris get caught in the intakes or
                        impellers, cavitation can occur, and though  NOTICE
                        the engine speed rises, forward thrust will de-   Do not lift or pull the cap with the retain-
                        crease. If this condition is allowed to contin-  ing cord.
                        ue, jet pump damage can occur and the   Set the cap where it cannot be acciden-
                        engines may overheat and seize. If there is  tally knocked overboard.
                        any sign that a  jet intake or impeller is
                        clogged  with  weeds or debris, follow this
                        clean-out procedure.                            2
                        (1) Turn off and remove the main switch key,                      1
                            remove the clip from the engine shut-off
                            switch, and  wait for all movement  to
                            stop.
                        (2) Open the rear platform hatch. (See page
                            128.)
                        (3) Check that the retaining cord is securely
                            attached to the  access  port cap  and
                            strap eye.                        1  “SET” mark
                                                              2  Slot A









                                                                                             209]]></page><page Index="222"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 210  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Trouble recovery



                                                                          2
                              1
                                                                      1
                                                                                           3









                        1  Access port cap                    1  “SET” mark
                                                              2  Slot A
                        (5) Remove any weeds or debris from the  3  Slot B
                            drive shaft, impeller, pump housing, and
                            jet thrust nozzle. If you cannot remove  (8) Check that the cap is parallel to the cen-
                            the debris, consult a Yamaha Boat Deal-  terline of the boat. Pull the handle force-
                            er.                                  fully to make sure that the cap is locked
                        (6) To reinstall the access port  cap, first  securely. If a strong pull will move the ac-
                            clean off any sand or other foreign matter  cess port cap, it is not locked securely—
                            from the cap or port surfaces. Apply a  the cap could be forced out by water
                            light coat of Yamalube Waterproof Ma-  pressure during operation.
                            rine Grease (P/N: ACC-GREAS-10-CT), if             1
                            available, to the seal of the access port
                            cap. If grease is not available, apply the
                            grease  during  the  post-operation
                            checks.
                        (7) Insert the cap so that the “SET” mark is
                            aligned with the slot A, and then while
                            pushing the handle turn the cap clock-
                            wise until the “SET” mark is aligned with
                            the slot B.
                                                              1  Parallel to the centerline of the boat

                                                              (9) Close the rear platform hatch.
                                                              NOTICE
                                                              Be sure the access port caps are locked
                                                              securely in place. Otherwise, the caps
                                                              could be forced out of the access ports by
                                                              water pressure,  causing loss of  perfor-
                                                              mance and possible damage.



                        210]]></page><page Index="223"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 211  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery


                        TIP:                                  (4) Open the cable clamps above the shift
                        The rear platform hatch has interlocks to shut  motor.
                        off the engines should the hatch be acciden-
                        tally opened during operation.  The engines                          1
                        will not restart unless the hatch is closed and
                        latched.

                        Raising the shift gates
                        (222SE / 222SD)
                        If the shift actuator malfunctions and the shift
                        gates remain in the lowered position, the boat
                        will not be able to move forward.
                        After raising the shift gates so that the boat  1  Cable clamps
                        can move forward, immediately return to
                        shore and have a Yamaha Boat Dealer ser-  (5) While pushing down the tip of the ball
                        vice the boat.                           joint, remove the shift cables  from  the
                        To raise the shift gates:                shift motor.
                        (1) Remove the lock  plate  from the emer-
                            gency engine shut-off switch.
                        (2) Open the driver’s side storage compart-
                            ment. (See page 125.)
                        (3) Grasp the shift motor cover at the loca-
                            tion shown in the figure, pull in the direc-              1
                            tion of the arrow to release the latch of
                            the shift motor cover from the fitting on
                            the shift motor, and remove the shift mo-  2
                            tor cover.

                                                              1  Ball joint
                                                     2
                                                              2  Shift cables







                         1
                              3

                        1  Shift motor cover
                        2  Latch
                        3  Shift motor




                                                                                             211]]></page><page Index="224"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 212  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Trouble recovery

                        (6) Align the removed shift cables with the  (3) Raise the shift gates to the forward posi-
                            grooves in the shift motor cover, and at-  tion.
                            tach them to the shift motor cover.  (4) Attach the shift cables to the shift motor
                                                                 cover.

                                                              Power steering system will not
                                                              operate (222SD)
                                                              If the power steering system malfunctions, a
                                                         1    warning will appear on the multi-function dis-
                                                              play and the direction of the boat cannot be
                                                              changed even if the steering wheel is turned.
                                   1                          Manually point the jet thrust nozzles in the
                                                              straight-ahead direction, and then use  the
                                                              difference in the amount of throttle for the
                        1  Shift motor cover grooves
                                                              port and starboard engines to steer the boat
                        (7) Place the shift motor cover in an open  and return to shore. After returning to shore,
                            space.                            have a Yamaha Boat Dealer check the boat.
                                                              TIP:
                        TIP:                                  If  a malfunction  is  detected for the power
                         In the preceding procedure, the shift gates  steering system, the maximum engine speed
                          cannot be placed in the neutral or reverse  will be limited to approximately 5000 rpm.
                          positions.
                         While the shift cables are attached to the  To point the jet thrust nozzles in the straight-
                          shift motor cover, the boat will move for-  ahead direction:
                          ward even if the remote control levers are  (1) Stop the engines  and remove the clip
                          moved to the reverse position.         from the engine shut-off switch.
                         222SD: While the shift cables are attached  (2) Open the driver’s side console compart-
                          to the shift motor cover, the boat will move  ment. (See page 125.)
                          forward even if the DRiVE mode is activat-  (3) Turn the  service valve on  the steering
                          ed and the throttle/shift paddle (left) is  pump in the direction shown in the illus-
                          pulled.                                tration.

                        If the shift gates cannot be raised using the
                        preceding procedure, the shift gates can be
                        raised manually from the water.
                        To raise the shift gates from the water:
                        (1) Follow the above steps 1-5 for “To raise
                            the shift gates”.
                        (2) Enter the water and move to the rear of
                            the marine jet.




                        212]]></page><page Index="225"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 213  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery



                                                              (6) Tighten the service valve.
                                                1
                                                              To change the steering direction of the boat:
                                                              Activate the running mode and use the differ-
                                                              ence in the amount of throttle for the port and
                                                              starboard engines.
                                                              Turning to port



                        1  Service valve
                                                                                      F
                        (4) Open the box to access the steering cyl-
                            inder.                                                    N
                                                                                      R
                                                    1


                                                              Turning to starboard





                                                                                      F
                                                                                      N
                        1  Steering cylinder
                                                                                      R
                        (5) Move the cable holder manually  and
                            align the end of the rod with the edge of
                            the bracket.
                                                              TIP:
                                                              Because the port and starboard engines op-
                                                              erate at the same engine speed when the sin-
                                                              gle lever mode or DRiVE mode is activated,
                                                              the difference in the amount of throttle for the
                                                              engines cannot be used to steer the boat.

                                                              Jump-starting
                                                                  WARNING
                               1          2
                                                              Severe injury or death may result if you ig-
                        1  Cable holder
                                                              nore any of the following:
                        2  Edge of the bracket

                                                                                             213]]></page><page Index="226"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 214  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Trouble recovery

                         If the blowers will not operate, ventilate
                          the engine compartment by opening the
                          engine hood for several minutes before
                          attempting a jump-start.
                         Do not connect the negative (–) jumper  1                     2
                          cable to the negative (–) terminal of the
                          dead  battery. Sparks could ignite bat-
                          tery or fuel vapors, which could cause
                          an explosion.
                                                                          5    4   3
                        If the  boat battery  runs down,  the engines
                        can be started in an emergency using a 12-  1  Negative (–) jumper cable
                                                              2  Positive (+) jumper cable
                        volt booster battery and jumper cables.
                                                              3  Start battery
                        To connect the jumper cables:
                                                              4  Booster battery
                        (1) Connect the positive (+) terminal of the
                                                              5  Engine hanger
                            dead battery to the positive (+) terminal
                            of the booster battery with the positive  (4) Start the engines, and then disconnect
                            (+) jumper cable.                    the jumper cables by reversing the above
                        (2) Connect one  end of the negative  (–)  steps. NOTICE: Do not turn the main
                            jumper cable to the negative (–) terminal  switch key or push the “START/STOP”
                            of the booster battery.              button for more than 5 seconds. If the
                        (3) Connect the other end of the negative (–)  engine does not start in 5 seconds, re-
                            jumper cable to  an engine hanger.   lease  the main switch key or
                            NOTICE: Be sure all connections are  “START/STOP” button and try again
                            secure and correct before attempting  after 15 seconds.  Continuous crank-
                            to start the engines. Any wrong con-  ing for more than 5 seconds will dis-
                            nection may damage  the  electrical  charge the battery and  the  engines
                            system.                              will not start. The starter motors may
                                                                 also be damaged if they are engaged
                                                                 continuously for more than 5 seconds.


                                                              Fuse replacement (AR220 / SX220 /
                                                              222S)
                                                                  WARNING
                                                              Do not use fuses  of a higher amperage
                                                              than recommended. Substitution with  a
                                                              fuse that has an improper rating can cause
                                                              extensive electrical system  damage and
                                                              possible fire.





                        214]]></page><page Index="227"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 215  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                        If a fuse is blown, replace it with the proper
                        fuse.                                    12 3       4      5     6
                        To replace a fuse:
                        (1) Open the engine hood. (See page 122.)
                        (2) Unfasten the band.






                                                                           8      7
                                    1
                                                              1  Electronic throttle valve fuse
                                                              2  Fuel pump fuse
                                                              3  Main relay drive fuse
                                                              4  Main fuse
                                                              5  Fuse puller
                                                              6  Battery fuse
                        1  Band
                                                              7  Spare fuse
                                                              8  Unused fuse
                        (3) Remove the fuse box from the air filter
                            case by pulling the fuse box toward the
                                                              (5) When replacing the accessory fuse, re-
                            bow.
                                                                 move the accessory fuse holder. (Open
                        (4) While pushing both sides of the fuse box
                                                                 the rear underseat storage compartment
                            cover inward, pull the cover toward the
                                                                 [port] to access the accessory fuse. [See
                            bow and remove it.
                                                                 page 124.])








                                  1


                        1  Fuse box cover












                                                                                             215]]></page><page Index="228"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 216  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Trouble recovery


                                                                Fuse amperage:
                                                       1          Electronic throttle valve fuse:
                                                                    10 A
                         11                                       Fuel pump fuse:
                                           2 3      4   5           10 A
                                                                  Main relay drive fuse:
                                                        6           10 A
                                                                  Main fuse:
                                          10  9  8  7               20 A
                                                                  Battery fuse:
                        1  Accessory fuse cover
                                                                    30 A
                        2  Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller/Switch
                           Panel fuse                             Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller/
                                                                  Switch Panel fuse:
                        3  DC outlet/Power Port/USB fuse
                        4  Bilge pump fuse                          20 A
                        5  Power distribution module fuse         DC outlet/Power Port/USB fuse:
                        6  DC outlet fuse                           20 A
                        7  USB fuse                               Bilge pump fuse:
                        8  Accessory 1 fuse                         4 A
                        9  Accessory 2 fuse                       Power distribution module fuse:
                        10 Accessory 3 fuse
                                                                    20 A
                        11 Audio fuse
                                                                  DC outlet fuse:
                                                                    20 A
                        (6) Replace the blown fuse with the spare
                                                                  USB fuse:
                            fuse of the correct amperage by using
                                                                    3 A
                            the fuse puller.
                                                                  Accessory 1 fuse:
                                                                    3 A
                                                                  Accessory 2 fuse:
                                                                    3 A
                                                                  Accessory 3 fuse:
                                                                    3 A
                                                                  Audio fuse:
                                                                    60 A
                                                              (7) Install the fuse box cover.
                                                              (8) If the accessory fuse was replaced, in-
                                                                 stall the accessory fuse holder.
                                                              (9) Install the fuse box to the air filter case.
                                                              (10) Fasten the band.
                                                              (11) Close the engine hood.





                        216]]></page><page Index="229"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 217  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                        Fuse replacement                      222SE (3-star model) / 222SD
                        (except for AR220 / SX220 / 222S)        1 23       4  5       6
                             WARNING
                        Do not use  fuses  of a higher amperage
                        than recommended. Substitution with  a                              7
                        fuse that has an improper rating can cause                          8
                        extensive electrical system  damage  and
                        possible fire.
                                                                                            7
                        If a fuse is blown, replace it with the proper            9
                        fuse.
                                                              1  Electronic throttle valve fuse
                        To replace a fuse:
                                                              2  Fuel pump fuse
                        (1) Open the engine hood. (See page 122.)
                                                              3  Main relay drive fuse
                        (2) While pushing both sides of the fuse box
                                                              4  Main fuse
                            cover inward, pull the cover toward the  5  Spare fuse
                            bow and remove it.                6  Fuse puller
                        1800 cc engine models                 7  Screw
                                                              8  BCU fuse
                                                              9  Spare fuse

                                                              222SE (4-star model)
                                       1                         1 23       4  5       6 7



                                                                                            8
                                                                                            9
                        1  Fuse box cover
                                                                                            8
                        1900 cc engine models
                                                                          11      10
                                                              1  Electronic throttle valve fuse
                                                              2  Fuel pump fuse
                                                              3  Main relay drive fuse
                                      1                       4  Main fuse
                                                              5  Spare fuse
                                                              6  Fuse puller
                                                              7  Battery fuse
                                                              8  Screw
                                                              9  BCU fuse
                                                              10 Spare fuse
                        1  Fuse box cover                     11 Unused fuse


                                                                                             217]]></page><page Index="230"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 218  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Trouble recovery

                        (3) 222SE / 222SD:  When replacing the
                            BCU fuse, remove the screws, and then
                            remove the fuse. Install the spare fuse,                          2
                            and then tighten the screws.
                        (4) When replacing an accessory  fuse,  re-
                            move the accessory fuse holder or cov-
                            er. (Open the rear underseat storage
                            compartment [port] to access the acces-
                            sory fuse. [See page 124.])
                                                               1
                                                    1
                                                              1  EPS 1 fuse (222SD)
                                                              2  EPS 2 fuse (222SD)

                            13 12          2 3 4 5      6     (5) Replace the blown fuse with the spare
                                                                 fuse of the correct amperage by using
                                                                 the fuse puller.
                                                        7

                                          11  10  9  8
                        1  Accessory fuse cover
                        2  Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller/Switch
                           Panel fuse
                        3  DC outlet/Power Port/USB fuse
                        4  Horn fuse
                        5  Bilge pump fuse
                        6  Power distribution module 1 fuse
                        7  DC outlet fuse
                        8  USB fuse
                        9  Accessory 1 fuse
                        10 Accessory 2 fuse
                        11 Accessory 3 fuse
                        12 Audio 1 fuse
                        13 Audio 2 fuse
















                        218]]></page><page Index="231"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 219  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                       Trouble recovery

                                                              (6) Install the fuse box cover.
                          Fuse amperage:
                                                              (7) If an accessory fuse was replaced, install
                            Electronic throttle valve fuse:
                                                                 the accessory fuse holder or cover.
                              10 A
                                                              (8) Close the engine hood.
                            Fuel pump fuse:
                              10 A
                                                              Running on one engine
                            Main relay drive fuse:
                              10 A                            NOTICE
                            Main fuse:                        Do not operate the boat above a no-wake
                              20 A                            speed with just one engine.
                            Battery fuse (222S):              Severe engine damage could result be-
                              30 A                            cause water can flood the non-operating
                            BCU fuse:                         engine through the water intake.
                              50 A (222SE / 222SD)
                            Display/Buzzer/GPS/Audio Controller/  If one engine becomes inoperative, the prop-
                            Switch Panel fuse:                erly running engine can be used to return to
                              20 A                            shore. Operate at a no-wake speed to pre-
                            DC outlet/Power Port/USB fuse:    vent water from flooding the non-operating
                              20 A                            engine through  the  water intake. The  no-
                            DC outlet fuse:                   wake mode  can be used for this purpose.
                              20 A                            (See pages 70 and 95.)
                            Horn fuse:
                              7.5 A
                            Bilge pump fuse:
                              4 A
                            Power distribution module 1 fuse:
                              20 A
                            USB fuse:
                              3 A
                            Accessory 1 fuse:
                              20 A
                            Accessory 2 fuse:
                              20 A
                            Accessory 3 fuse:
                              3 A
                            Audio fuse:
                              60 A
                            EPS 1 fuse (222SD):
                              60 A
                            EPS 2 fuse (222SD):
                              60 A



                                                                                             219]]></page><page Index="232"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 220  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Trouble recovery

                        Towing the boat
                             WARNING

                         The  operator of the  towing boat must
                          keep  speed to a minimum  and avoid
                          traffic or obstacles which could be  a
                          hazard to either boat.
                         The towing line should be long enough
                          so the towed boat will not collide with
                          the towing boat when slowing down.

                        The boat should be towed only if it becomes
                        inoperative.
                        The towing rope should be long enough so
                        that the boat will not collide with the towing
                        boat when slowing  down. A good rule of
                        thumb is a tow rope which is three times the
                        combined length of the towing boat and the
                        boat.
                        Tow the boat using the bow eye only. Tow the
                        boat at a no-wake speed. NOTICE: Do not
                        tow the boat at speed fast enough to leave
                        a wake (8 km/h, 5 mph). Severe engine
                        damage could result because water can
                        flood the non-operating engines through
                        the water intakes.










                             1



                        1  Bow eye









                        220]]></page><page Index="233"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 221  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                               Consumer information

                                                   Limited warranty































































                                                                                             221]]></page><page Index="234"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 222  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Consumer information


































































                        222]]></page><page Index="235"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 223  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                               Consumer information

                                       YAMAHA EXTENDED SERVICE (Y.E.S.)










                          Keep your Yamaha Boat protected even after   sonable expenses you incur because your
                          the 1-year warranty coverage provisions  Yamaha needs covered service: replace-
                          expire with genuine Yamaha Extended Service  ment vehicle rental, emergency towing,
                          (Y.E.S.).                             phone calls, even food and lodging when
                                                                you are away from home. This superb cov-
                          Y.E.S. is designed and administered by  erage goes into effect when you purchase
                          Yamaha Motor Corporation to provide maxi-  Y.E.S., so it applies to any warranty repairs
                          mum owner satisfaction.You get uninterrupted  as well as covered repairs during your entire
                          factory-backed coverage for extra peace of
                                                                Y.E.S. plan period.
                          mind.
                                                              • Y.E.S. coverage is honored at any autho-
                          • Y.E.S. is flexible. You choose the plan that’s   rized Yamaha dealer nationwide.
                           right for you: 12 months, 24 months, 36
                           months, or up to 48 months on certain mod-  • Y.E.S. coverage is transferable to a new
                           els   beyond the 1-year warranty coverage pe-  owner if you sell or trade-in. That can make
                           riod. That means you can get up to 5 years   your Yamaha Boat much more valuable!
                           of coverage on the power train, controls, and
                           other components to match the comforting   This excellent Y.E.S. plan coverage is only
                           5-year standard protection on the hull.  available to Yamaha owners like you, and only
                                                              while your Yamaha is still within the first year
                          • Y.E.S. is designed and administered by the   of the  Yamaha Limited  Warranty period. So
                           same Yamaha people who handle your war-  visit your authorized Yamaha dealer to get all
                           ranty–and it shows in the comprehensive  the facts. He can show you how easy it is to
                           coverage benefits. There are no limitations   protect your investment with Yamaha Extended
                           on hours of use. Coverage isn’t limited to   Service. We urge you to act now. You’ll get
                           “moving parts” or the “drive train” like many  the excellent benefits of TRIP coverage right
                           other plans. And Y.E.S. covers manufactur-  away, and you’ll rest easy knowing you’ll have
                           ing defects just like the warranty. See the   strong factory-backed protection even after
                           sample contract at your Yamaha dealer to   your Yamaha Limited  Warranty expires. See
                           see how comforting uninterrupted factory-  your dealer today!
                           backed protection can be.
                                                              A special note:
                          • You don’t have to pay anything for cov-
                           ered repairs. There’s no deductible to pay,  If visiting your dealer isn’t convenient, contact
                           and repairs aren’t “prorated.” You don’t have  Yamaha with your Primary ID number or Hull
                           any “out-of-pocket” expenses for covered  Identification Number. We’ll be happy to help
                           repairs.                           you get the Y.E.S. coverage you need.
                          • In addition,  Travel and Recreation      Yamaha Service Marketing
                           Interruption Protection (TRIP) is included  P.O. Box 6555
                           at no extra cost. TRIP gives you up to $250   Cypress, CA 90630
                           reimbursement per occurrence for any rea-  1-(866)-YES-EXTD
                                                                     (1-866-937-3983)





                                                                                             223]]></page><page Index="236"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 224  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Consumer information

                                                   Sample float plan
                        Leave a float plan with a responsible person on shore before boating. The example below can
                        be copied and used.


                                                     FLOAT PLAN
                                                   VESSEL INFORMATION
                           BOAT MAKE:      Yamaha              MOTOR TYPE:  Jet
                           MODEL:
                           LENGTH:                             REGISTRATION NO:
                           DECK COLOR:                         HULL COLOR:
                                                       PASSENGER
                           OPERATOR                            EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #1:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #2:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #3:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #4:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                                                  DEPARTURE INFORMATION
                           POINT OF DEPARTURE:                 DATE/TIME:
                           TOW VEHICLE            LICENSE:     TRAILER LICENSE:
                           MAKE / MODEL
                                                 DESTINATION INFORMATION
                           DESTINATION:       LORAN OR GPS COORDINATES:   INTENDED ACTIVITY:




                           EXPECTED RETURN    DATE:                       TIME:
                           LOCAL U.S. COAST GUARD PHONE #:
                           NOTES:               HULL COLOR:

                           OPERATOR                            EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:
                           PASSENGER #1:                       EMERGENCY PHONE:
                           ADDRESS:




                        224]]></page><page Index="237"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 225  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                         Index

                        A                                     Bimini top, storing in the fully collapsed
                        “ACC”1/“ACC”2 switch (222SE /          position (SX220).................................. 145
                          222SD).................................................. 92  Bimini top, storing in the upright
                        Access port cap check .......................... 160  position (SX220).................................. 144
                        Accessory outlet .................................... 135  Bimini top (SX220).................................. 143
                        Additional equipment                  Bimini top, trailering (except for
                          recommendations................................. 19  SX220) ................................................ 142
                        Anchor light (except for SX220) ............. 130  Bimini top, trailering (SX220).................. 145
                        Anchor light (SX220) .............................. 131  Blower check (AR220 / SX220) .............. 162
                        Anchor storage compartment................ 122  Blower checks (except for AR220 /
                        Anchoring............................................... 180  SX220) ................................................ 163
                        Approval labels of emission control   “BLOWER” switch (222SE / 222SD) ........ 92
                          certificate................................................ 3  “BLOWER” switch (AR220 / SX220) ........ 51
                        Auto Volume setting screen............. 87, 115  Bluetooth screen (222S)...........................83
                        Auxiliary screen................................ 83, 110  Bluetooth screen (222SE / 222SD) ........110
                                                              Boarding from a dock or landing jetty.... 178
                        B                                     Boarding from the bow .......................... 177
                        Backing your trailer................................ 184  Boarding from the water ........................ 177
                        Basic stain guide.................................... 190  Boat characteristics ................................. 20
                        Batteries and battery switches ................ 42  Boat control functions.............................. 42
                        Battery care............................................ 191  Boating with passengers........................ 176
                        Battery check......................................... 162  Bow ladder............................................. 133
                        Battery voltage warning (222S)................ 90  Brightness setting screen (222S) ............. 86
                        Battery voltage warning (222SE /      Brightness setting screen (222SE /
                          222SD)................................................ 118  222SD) ................................................ 113
                        Battery voltage warning (AR220 /      Brightness setting screen (AR220 /
                          SX220) .................................................. 65  SX220) .................................................. 60
                        Beaching................................................ 179
                        “BILGE” switch (222S) ............................. 67  C
                        “BILGE” switch (AR220 / SX220)............. 51  Center display (222S)............................... 74
                        Bilge water check................................... 162  Center display (AR220 / SX220)............... 56
                        Bilge water, draining .............................. 152  Check engine warning (222S) .................. 89
                        Bilge water, draining on land ................. 152  Check engine warning (222SE /
                        Bilge water, draining on water ............... 153  222SD) ................................................ 117
                        Bimini top (except for SX220) ................ 139  Check engine warning (AR220 /
                        Bimini top, installing (except for     SX220) .................................................. 64
                          SX220) ................................................ 143  Cleaning the boat................................... 188
                        Bimini top, installing (SX220) ................. 146  Communication error warning (222S) ...... 90
                        Bimini top, removing (except for      Communication error warning (222SE /
                          SX220) ................................................ 142  222SD) ................................................ 118
                        Bimini top, removing (SX220)................. 146  Communication error warning (AR220 /
                        Bimini top, setting up (except for     SX220) .................................................. 65
                          SX220) ................................................ 139  Controller (222S) ......................................69
                        Bimini top, setting up (SX220)................ 143  Controller (222SE / 222SD) ...................... 94
                        Bimini top, storing (except for SX220) ... 141  Cooling water pilot outlet check ............ 167
                                                              Crossing wakes and swells.................... 180

                                                                                             225]]></page><page Index="238"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 226  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Index

                        Cruise assist (222S) ................................. 69  F
                        Cruise assist (222SE / 222SD) ................. 94  Factory reset screen (222S) .....................87
                        Cruise assist (AR220 / SX220) ................. 52  Factory reset screen (222SE / 222SD)... 115
                        Cruising limitations................................... 16  Factory reset screen (AR220 / SX220)..... 61
                        “CTSY LIGHTS” switch (AR220 /         Fire extinguisher check .......................... 158
                          SX220) .................................................. 51  Fire extinguisher, operating.................... 159
                                                              Fire extinguisher, storing........................ 159
                        D                                     Float mode ............................................. 101
                        Depth alarm setting screen (222S)........... 85  Flushing the cooling system .................. 187
                        Depth alarm setting screen (222SE /   Front underseat storage
                          222SD)................................................ 113  compartments ....................................123
                        Depth alarm setting screen (AR220 /   Front walk-through................................. 129
                          SX220) .................................................. 60  Fuel ........................................................ 147
                        Depth warning (222S)............................... 90  Fuel level check...................................... 167
                        Depth warning (222SE / 222SD) ............ 118  Fuel requirement ....................................147
                        Depth warning (AR220 / SX220) .............. 65  Fuel system............................................ 192
                        Docking.................................................. 178  Fuel system checks ............................... 160
                        Drain plug check.................................... 162  Fuse replacement (AR220 / SX220 /
                        Drive control screen............................... 107  222S)................................................... 214
                        DRiVE mode (222SD) ............................. 101  Fuse replacement (except for AR220 /
                        Driver’s seat ........................................... 119  SX220 / 222S)..................................... 217
                        Driver’s side console compartment ....... 125
                        Driving your boat.................................... 169  G
                                                              Getting to know your boat ..................... 169
                        E                                     Glossary, boat.......................................... 29
                        Emergency procedures.......................... 209  Glove compartment (AR220 / SX220).... 127
                        Emission control information ..................... 3  Glove compartment (except for AR220 /
                        Enclosed head compartment................. 124  SX220) ................................................ 127
                        Engine break-in (AR220 / SX220)........... 155  Grease points......................................... 192
                        Engine break-in (except for AR220 /
                          SX220) ................................................ 155  H
                        Engine covers, removing and installing   Hazard information................................... 19
                          (except for AR220 / SX220) ................ 195  Helm controls (222S)................................66
                        Engine hood........................................... 122  Helm controls (222SE / 222SD) ............... 91
                        Engine oil ............................................... 148  Helm controls (AR210 / SX210)................ 50
                        Engine oil, checking (AR220 / SX220).... 149  Hitch....................................................... 183
                        Engine oil, checking (except for AR220 /   Home screen (222S)................................. 76
                          SX220) ................................................ 150  Home screen (222SE / 222SD) .............. 102
                        Engine oil level check............................. 161  Home screen (AR220 / SX220) ................ 58
                        Engine oil requirement ........................... 148  Horn check............................................. 166
                        Engine serial numbers................................ 2  “HORN” switch (222S) ............................. 67
                        Engine shut-off cord (lanyard) check..... 166  “HORN” switch (222SE / 222SD)............. 92
                        Engine shut-off switch ............................. 42  “HORN” switch (AR220 / SX220) ............. 51
                        Engine shut-off switch check................. 167  Hull Identification Number (HIN)................. 1
                        Enjoy your boat responsibly..................... 28
                        Exterior components................................ 30  I
                                                              Identification number records .................... 1
                        226]]></page><page Index="239"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 227  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                         Index

                        J                                     Manufactured date label (1050 cc engine
                        Jet intake checks ................................... 160  models) ...................................................5
                        Jet pump, cleaning ................................ 209  Manufactured date labels (1800 cc /
                        Joystick, using (222S) .............................. 67  1900 cc engine models).......................... 5
                        Joystick, using (222SE / 222SD).............. 93  Map screen (222S) ................................... 76
                        Jump-starting......................................... 213  Map screen (222SE / 222SD)................. 102
                                                              Map settings screen (222S) .....................78
                        L                                     Map settings screen (222SE / 222SD) ... 104
                        Labels, important ....................................... 8  Media screen (222S) ................................81
                        Labels, other ............................................ 14  Media screen (222SE / 222SD) .............. 108
                        Labels, warning........................................ 10  Multi-function display elements (222S)....72
                        Language setting screen (222S) .............. 87  Multi-function display elements (222SE /
                        Language setting screen (222SE /       222SD) .................................................. 97
                          222SD)................................................ 114  Multi-function display elements (AR220 /
                        Language setting screen (AR220 /       SX220) .................................................. 55
                          SX220) .................................................. 61  Multi-function display, touching (222S) ... 67
                        Launching .............................................. 185  Multi-function display, touching (222SE /
                        Learning to operate your boat ............... 169  222SD) .................................................. 93
                        Leaving a dock....................................... 174  Multi-function display unit operation
                        Lifting ..................................................... 186  (222S).................................................... 67
                        Limitations on who may operate the    Multi-function display unit operation
                          boat ...................................................... 15  (222SE / 222SD) ................................... 93
                        Limited warranty .................................... 221  Multi-function display unit operation
                        Loading .................................................. 185  (AR220 / SX220) ................................... 54
                        Long-term storage ................................. 192
                        Low fuel level warning (222S) .................. 90  N
                        Low fuel level warning (222SE /       “NAV LIGHTS” switch (222SE / 222SD)... 92
                          222SD)................................................ 118  “NAV/ANC” switch (AR220 / SX220)........ 51
                        Low fuel level warning (AR220 /       Navigation and anchor lights checks..... 164
                          SX220) .................................................. 65  Night operation ........................................ 21
                        Low oil pressure warning (222S).............. 89  No-wake mode / cruise assist switch ...... 52
                        Low oil pressure warning (222SE /     No-wake mode (222S) ............................. 70
                          222SD)................................................ 117  No-wake mode (222SE / 222SD) ............. 95
                        Low oil pressure warning (AR220 /     No-wake mode (AR220 / SX220) ............. 53
                          SX220) .................................................. 64
                        Lubrication ............................................. 192  O
                                                              Operation buttons (222S)......................... 69
                        M                                     Operation buttons (222SE / 222SD)......... 94
                        Main components, location ..................... 30  Operation mode ..................................... 101
                        Main switch (222SE / 222SD) .................. 44  Operational requirements ........................ 17
                        Main switches (AR220 / SX220 / 222S) ... 44  Over temperature warning (222S) ............ 89
                        Maintenance .......................................... 195  Over temperature warning (222SE /
                        Maintenance setting screen (222S).......... 86  222SD) ................................................ 117
                        Maintenance setting screen (222SE /   Over temperature warning (AR220 /
                          222SD)................................................ 114  SX220) .................................................. 64
                        Maintenance setting screen (AR220 /   Owner’s/operator’s manual.................... 195
                          SX220) .................................................. 61
                                                                                             227]]></page><page Index="240"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 228  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                        Index

                        P                                     Setting screen (AR220 / SX220)............... 59
                        Passenger’s seat (except for AR220 /   Side table ...............................................135
                          SX220) ................................................ 120  Single lever mode .................................. 101
                        Periodic maintenance chart ................... 197  Ski locker ...............................................123
                        Post-launch checks ............................... 166  Specifications (1050 cc engine
                        Post-operation care ............................... 187  models) ...............................................200
                        Post-operation checks........................... 181  Specifications (1800 cc / 1900 cc
                        Power steering system will not operate   engine models) ................................... 202
                          (222SD) ............................................... 212  Star labels (4-star models) ......................... 5
                        Pre-launch checks ................................. 157  Starting the engines ............................... 169
                        Pre-operation check points ................... 157  “START/STOP” buttons (222SE /
                        Pre-operation checklist.......................... 156  222SD) .................................................. 45
                        Primary Identification (PRI-ID) number ...... 1  Static bar (222S)....................................... 73
                                                              Static bar (AR220 / SX220) ...................... 55
                        R                                     Status indicator bar (222S)....................... 75
                        Radio screen (AM/FM) (222S) .................. 82  Status indicator bar (222SE / 222SD) .... 100
                        Radio screen (AM/FM) (222SE /         Steering.................................................... 48
                          222SD)................................................ 109  Steering system checks.........................157
                        Raising the shift gates (222SE /      Stereo system (AR220 / SX220)............... 54
                          222SD)................................................ 211  Stern ladder............................................ 134
                        Rear underseat storage compartment    Stern storage compartments ................. 128
                          (port) ................................................... 124  Stopping the boat .................................. 176
                        Rear underseat storage compartment    Stopping the engines............................. 173
                          (starboard) .......................................... 124  Storage compartments .......................... 122
                        Rear walk-through ................................. 129  Stowable table (except for AR220 /
                        Remote control keypad (except for      SX220) ................................................ 126
                          AR220 / SX220) .................................. 135  Swim platform........................................ 134
                        Remote control lever checks ................. 157  Swim platform seat (except for AR220 /
                        Remote control levers.............................. 45  SX220) ................................................ 120
                        Required equipment ................................ 18  Switch circuit breakers............................. 51
                        Reverse RPM control (222S).................... 70  Switch panel (222S) ................................. 67
                        Reverse RPM control (222SE / 222SD).... 96  Switch panel (222SE / 222SD) ................. 92
                        Reverse RPM control (AR220 / SX220).... 53  Switches (AR220 / SX220) ....................... 51
                        Rules of the road...................................... 22  System control screen (222S) .................. 84
                        Running mode........................................ 101  System control screen (222SE /
                        Running on one engine.......................... 219  222SD) ................................................ 111

                        S                                     T
                        Sample float plan ................................... 224  Throttle/shift paddle checks (222SE) ..... 158
                        Satellite status.......................................... 61  Throttle/shift paddles (222SD) ................. 47
                        Screen tab bar (222S) .............................. 74  Tilt lever.................................................... 49
                        Screen tab bar (222SE / 222SD).............. 99  Time setting screen (222S)....................... 85
                        Screen tab bar (AR220 / SX220).............. 56  Time setting screen (222SE / 222SD) .... 113
                        Seating locations ..................................... 27  Time setting screen (AR220 / SX220) ...... 60
                        Seats...................................................... 119  To get more boating safety information... 28
                        Setting screen (222S)............................... 85  Towing the boat ..................................... 220
                        Setting screen (222SE / 222SD)............. 112
                        228]]></page><page Index="241"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 229  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM



                                                                                         Index

                        Track (222S)............................................. 77
                        Track (222SE / 222SD)........................... 103
                        Trailering checklist ................................. 183
                        Trailering the boat .................................. 183
                        Trip screen (222S).................................... 80
                        Trip screen (222SE / 222SD).................. 106
                        Trip screen (AR220 / SX220).................... 58
                        Troubleshooting..................................... 206
                        Troubleshooting chart............................ 206
                        Tuner Region setting screen (222S)......... 87
                        Tuner Region setting screen (222SE /
                          222SD)................................................ 114
                        Turning the boat..................................... 174
                        U
                        Underwater seats................................... 121
                        Unit setting screen (222S)........................ 86
                        Unit setting screen (222SE / 222SD)...... 113
                        Unit setting screen (AR220 / SX220)........ 60
                        USB chargers......................................... 136

                        W
                        Wakeboard tower, collapsing and
                          setting up (except for SX220) ............. 138
                        Wakeboard tower (except for SX220).... 138
                        Wakeboarding and water-skiing .............. 21
                        Walk-through ......................................... 129
                        Warning icon bar (AR220 / SX220) .......... 57
                        Warnings (222S)....................................... 88
                        Warnings (222SE / 222SD)..................... 116
                        Warnings (AR220 / SX220)....................... 63
                        Waypoint (222S)....................................... 77
                        Waypoint (222SE / 222SD)..................... 103
                        Weather screen (222S)............................. 82
                        Weather screen (222SE / 222SD) .......... 110
                        Wet storage compartment ..................... 128
                        Windshield ............................................. 129
                        Wireless charger .................................... 137
                        Y
                        YAMAHA EXTENDED SERVICE
                          (Y.E.S.)................................................ 223
                        Z
                        Zone control screen (222S)...................... 84
                        Zone control screen (222SE / 222SD).... 111


                                                                                             229]]></page><page Index="242"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 230  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM]]></page><page Index="243"><![CDATA[SportsBoat_F7G12.book  Page 1  Thursday, May 22, 2025  1:06 PM










                        For your best ownership experience, think Genuine Yamaha!

                        Genuine Yamaha Parts – Genuine Yamaha replacement parts are the exact same
                        parts as the ones originally equipped on your vehicle, providing you with the
                        performance and durability you have come to expect. Why settle for aftermarket parts
                        that may not provide full confidence and satisfaction?

                        Genuine Yamaha Accessories – Yamaha only offers accessories that meet our
                        high standards for quality and performance. Buy with confidence, knowing your
                        Genuine Yamaha Accessories will fit right and perform right – right out of the box.

                        Yamalube – Take care of your Yamaha with legendary Yamalube oils, lubricants,
                        and care products. They’re formulated and approved by the toughest judges we
                        know: the Yamaha engineering teams that know your Yamaha from the inside out.

                        Genuine Yamaha Service Manuals – Get the same factory manual for your vehicle
                        that the technicians at your authorized Yamaha dealer use. Service manuals are
                        available through your Yamaha dealer or you can order them directly through
                        yamahapubs.com.

                        Genuine Yamaha products are available only from your Yamaha dealer.

                        Find out more at yamaha-motor.com]]></page><page Index="244"><![CDATA[Printed in USA
                        June 2025-0.3 × 1 CR




                                                                                            DIC183]]></page></pages></Search>